FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041 802.11abgn Module

 

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review HP MINI User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: July 2009 Document Part Number: 537596-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iii Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review iv Safety warning notice Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Table of contents 1 Features Identifying hardware ............................................................................................................................. 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Lights ................................................................................................................... 3 Buttons ................................................................................................................ 4 Keys .................................................................................................................... 5 Front components ................................................................................................................ 5 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 6 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 7 Display components ........................................................................................................... 7 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 8 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 8 Additional hardware components ........................................................................................ 9 Identifying the labels ........................................................................................................................... 10 2 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 11 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 11 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 11 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 12 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 12 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 12 Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 12 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 13 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 13 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 13 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 13 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 14 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 15 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 15 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 15 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 16 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 16 v Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 17 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 18 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 18 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 18 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 19 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 19 Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 19 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 19 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 19 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 19 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 19 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep ............................................................. 20 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 20 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 22 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................... 22 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 22 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 22 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 23 Replacing the battery ........................................................................................................ 23 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................................... 24 Shutting down the computer ............................................................................................................... 24 3 Wireless Using wireless devices (select models only) ...................................................................................... 25 Identifying wireless and network icons .............................................................................. 25 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 26 Using the wireless switch ................................................................................................... 26 Using operating system controls ........................................................................................ 26 Using a WLAN .................................................................................................................................... 27 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 27 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 27 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 29 Roaming to another network .............................................................................................. 29 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ...................................................................... 30 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................................. 30 4 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 31 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 31 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 32 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 33 vi Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using preinstalled multimedia software ............................................................................. 34 Installing multimedia software from a disc ......................................................................... 34 Sharing optical drives ........................................................................................................ 34 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 35 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 35 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 35 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 37 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 37 Optical drive (select models only) ...................................................................................................... 38 Identifying the external optical drive .................................................................................. 38 Using optical discs ............................................................................................................. 38 Selecting the right disc ....................................................................................................... 38 CD-R discs ........................................................................................................ 39 CD-RW discs ..................................................................................................... 39 DVDR discs ..................................................................................................... 39 DVDRW discs ................................................................................................. 39 Playing music ..................................................................................................................... 39 Watching a movie .............................................................................................................. 40 Changing DVD region settings .......................................................................................... 41 Creating or burning a CD or DVD .................................................................................... 42 Removing an optical disc (CD or DVD) ............................................................................. 42 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 44 Adjusting webcam properties ............................................................................................. 44 5 Security Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................... 45 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 46 Setting passwords in Windows .......................................................................................... 46 Setting passwords in Computer Setup .............................................................................. 46 Setup password ................................................................................................................. 47 Managing a setup password ............................................................................. 48 Entering a setup password ................................................................................ 49 Power-on password ........................................................................................................... 49 Managing a power-on password ....................................................................... 50 Entering a power-on password ......................................................................... 51 Requiring a power-on password at restart ........................................................ 52 Using Computer Setup DriveLock ..................................................................................... 52 Setting a DriveLock password ........................................................................... 53 Entering a DriveLock password ........................................................................ 54 Changing a DriveLock password ...................................................................... 55 Removing DriveLock protection ........................................................................ 56 Using Computer Setup security features ............................................................................................ 57 Securing system devices ................................................................................................... 57 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

vii Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using Computer Setup stringent security .......................................................................... 57 Setting stringent security ................................................................................... 58 Removing stringent security .............................................................................. 59 Viewing Computer Setup System Information ................................................................... 59 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 60 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 61 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 62 Installing a security cable ................................................................................................................... 63 6 External devices Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 64 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 64 Stopping and removing a USB device ............................................................................... 64 Using USB legacy support ................................................................................................. 65 Using external drives .......................................................................................................................... 66 Using optional external devices ......................................................................................... 66 Using an optional external MultiBay II ............................................................................... 66 Using an optional external optical drive (select models only) ............................................................. 67 Inserting an optical disc (CD or DVD) ................................................................................ 67 Removing an optical disc (CD or DVD) ............................................................................. 68 When the disc tray opens .................................................................................. 68 When the disc tray does not open ..................................................................... 69 7 External media cards Using SD Card Reader cards ............................................................................................................. 70 Inserting a digital card ........................................................................................................ 70 Stopping and removing a digital card ................................................................................ 71 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 72 Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................... 72 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 72 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 72 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 72 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 72 Displaying system information (fn+esc) ............................................................ 73 Initiating Sleep (fn+f1) ....................................................................................... 73 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) ................................................................... 75 Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f3) ............................................................... 75 Increasing screen brightness (fn+f4) ................................................................. 75 Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) ................................................................................ 75 Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) ........................................................................... 75 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) .................................................................. 76 viii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) .................................................................... 76 Using keypads .................................................................................................................................... 76 Using the embedded numeric keypad ............................................................................... 76 Enabling and disabling the embedded numeric keypad .................................... 76 Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad ............................. 77 Using an optional external numeric keypad ....................................................................... 77 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard ............................................................................................... 78 9 Drives Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................................. 79 Handling drives ................................................................................................................................... 79 Improving HD performance ................................................................................................................ 81 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 81 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 81 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) .................................................................................. 82 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ................................................................................. 82 Using HP 3D DriveGuard software .................................................................................... 83 Replacing a hard drive ....................................................................................................................... 84 10 Memory modules 11 Computer Setup Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................... 91 Using Computer Setup ....................................................................................................................... 91 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ..................................................................... 91 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................... 92 Computer Setup menus ..................................................................................................................... 92 File menu ........................................................................................................................... 92 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 93 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 93 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 94 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 96 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ix Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review x Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 1 Features Identifying hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most computer models. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Top components TouchPad Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 1 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. 2 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Front components Component

(1) Drive light Description Blinking: The hard drive is being accessed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 5 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review NOTE: For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Additional hardware components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power.

*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 9 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 2 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power light blinks and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Press fn+f1. Click Start, and then click the Power button. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Lock button, and then click Sleep.

To exit Sleep:

Briefly slide the power switch. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the computer exits Sleep, you must enter your Setting power options 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 120 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power, 1080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:

1. Click Start, and then click the arrow next to the Lock button. 2. Click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly slide the power switch. The power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

your Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the computer exits Hibernation, you must enter Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan.

To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a critical battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:

1. Right-click the taskbar, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Notification Area tab. 3. Under System icons, clear the Power check box to hide the battery meter icon, or select the Power check box to display the battery meter icon. 4. Click OK. Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 12 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Selecting a different power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 3. Change the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep timeout settings, as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). 5. Click Save changes. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP.

Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or optional expansion product

Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external AC power 13 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft.

When you are charging or calibrating a battery

When you are installing or modifying system software

When you are writing information to a CD or DVD When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance.

When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the computer to external AC power, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). 14 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Finding battery information in Help and Support The Battery information section of the Help and Support Learning Center provides the following tools and information:

Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity

To access battery information:

Select Start > Help and Support > Learning Center > HP Power and Battery Learning Center. Using Battery Check Battery Check, a part of the Total Care Advisor, provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to function properly. 2. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshooting tools > Battery Check. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 15 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Displaying the remaining battery charge

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or View the estimated number of minutes of battery charge remaining in Windows Mobility Center:

Click the battery meter icon, and then click Windows Mobility Center. or Select Start > Control Panel > Mobile PC > Windows Mobility Center. The time shown indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery if the battery continues to provide power at the current level. For example, the time remaining will decrease when a DVD is playing and will increase when a DVD stops playing. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source can cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, initiate Hibernation or shut down the computer through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Insert the battery into the battery bay (1) and push in until it is seated. The battery release latches (2) automatically lock the battery into place. To remove the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery. 16 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 3. Remove the battery (2) from the computer. Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, an optional expansion product, or an optional docking device. The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:

area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:

On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery has reached a low battery level or critical battery level and is not charging. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Using battery power 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies, depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the computer when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the computer enters a critical battery level, and the battery light blinks rapidly. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. 18 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available

Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available 1. Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available

Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by briefly sliding the power switch. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate

When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 19 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review To fully charge the battery:

1. Insert the battery into the computer. 2. Connect the computer to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the computer turns on. 3. Leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the computer turns off. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Record the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. 9. Click OK. 10. Click Save changes. Step 3: Discharge the battery The computer must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the computer, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it.

If you plan to leave the computer unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the computer occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the computer is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. 20 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review To discharge a battery:

1. Unplug the computer from its external power source, but do not turn off the computer. 2. Run the computer on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the computer shuts down. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 21 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:

1. 2. Plug the computer into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the computer turns off. You can use the computer while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the computer is off. If the computer is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the computer reaches a critical battery level. 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. 4. Click Change advanced power settings. 5. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 6. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save changes. Conserving battery power

Select low power-use settings through Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f3 and fn+f4 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. 22 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. NOTE: A stored battery should be checked every 6 months. If the capacity is less than 50 percent, recharge the battery before returning it to storage. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. Refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for battery disposal information. Replacing the battery Computer battery life varies, depending on the power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Battery Check notifies you to replace the battery when an internal cell is not charging properly, or when the battery storage capacity has reached a weak condition. A message refers you to the HP Web site for more information about ordering a replacement battery. If the battery is possibly covered by an HP warranty, instructions include a warranty ID. NOTE: To ensure that you always have battery power when you need it, HP recommends purchasing a new battery when the storage capacity indicator turns green-yellow. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 23 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms:

The computer will not turn on when connected to the AC adapter. The display does not turn on when the computer is connected to the AC adapter. The power light is off when the computer is connected to the AC adapter.

To test the AC adapter:

1. Remove the battery from the computer. 2. Connect the AC adapter. 3. Turn on the computer.

If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is functioning properly. If the power light remains off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced.

Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter by selecting Start > Help and Support > Contact support. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the computer is shut down. The Shut Down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer

When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port

When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period To shut down the computer, follow these steps:

NOTE:

before shutdown is possible. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation 1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Click Start, and then click the arrow next to the Lock button. 3. Click Shut Down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then slide the power switch. Slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 24 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 3 Wireless Using wireless devices (select models only) Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point.

Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Computers with WLAN devices support one or more of the following IEEE industry standards:

802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. NOTE: 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g.

Wi-Fi CERTIFIED 802.11n draft 2.0 supports data rates of up to 300 Mbps and may operate at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, making it backward compatible with 802.11a, b, and g. NOTE: The specifications for the 802.11n WLAN are draft specifications and are not final. If the final specifications differ from the draft specifications, it may affect the ability of the computer to communicate with other 802.11n WLAN devices. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network icons Icon Name Description Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using wireless devices (select models only) 25 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Wireless (connected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless switch on the computer. Wireless

(disconnected) Indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. Network status

(connected) Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Network status

(disconnected) Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed but no network devices are connected to the network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless switch

Operating system controls Using the wireless switch The computer has a wireless switch, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is amber, all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless switch to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Computer Setup. NOTE:

you reenable your devices. If the wireless devices are disabled by Computer Setup, the wireless switch will not work until Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For more information, refer to the operating system documentation. 26 Chapter 3 Wireless Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably.

A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. NOTE: To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure

(provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The wireless computer (3)

The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a WLAN 27 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network (uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security Many wireless base stations, gateways, and routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks.

Work behind a firewall A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network and then discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types.

Use wireless encryption A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a wireless security protocol that uses a WEP key to encode or encrypt all network data before it is transmitted. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others will not be able to use the WLAN.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network.

Close your network If possible, prevent your network name (SSID) from being broadcast by the wireless transmitter. Most networks initially broadcast the name, telling any computer nearby that your network is available. By closing the network, other computers are less likely to know that your network exists. If your network is closed and the SSID is not broadcast, you will need to know or remember NOTE:

the SSID to connect new devices to the network. Write down the SSID and store it in a secure place before closing the network. 28 Chapter 3 Wireless Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is amber, slide the wireless switch. Select Start > Connect To. Select your WLAN from the list, and then type the network security key, if required.

If the network is unsecured, meaning that anyone can access the network, a warning is displayed. Click Connect Anyway to accept the warning and complete the connection. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click Connect to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Show all connections. A list NOTE:

of options will appear that includes creating a new network connection, as well as troubleshooting connection issues. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:

Information from your ISP and the manufacturer's instructions included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support

For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. For additional information on connecting your computer to a corporate WLAN, contact your network administrator or IT department. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a WLAN 29 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers)

Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. 30 Chapter 3 Wireless Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 4 Multimedia Multimedia features Your computer includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music and view pictures. Your computer may include the following multimedia components:

Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated microphones for recording your own audio Integrated webcam that allows you to capture and share video Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures Hotkeys that provide fast access to volume control

NOTE: Your computer may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your computer. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia features 31 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review

To increase volume, press fn+f11.

Windows volume control:

a. Click the Volume icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Click the Mute icon to mute the volume. or a. Right-click the Volume icon in the notification area, and then click Open Volume Mixer. b. In the Speakers column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the Volume slider up or down. You can also mute the volume by clicking the Mute icon. If the Volume icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:

a. Right-click in the notification area, and then click Properties. b. Click the Notification Area tab. c. Under System icons, select the Volume check box. d. Click OK.

Program volume control:

Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your computer includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music and view pictures. The following sections provide details about preinstalled multimedia software and installing multimedia software from a disc. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia software 33 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Audio Your computer enables you to use a variety of audio features:

Play music using your computer speakers and/or connected external speakers Record sound using the internal microphones or connect an external microphone Download music from the Internet Create multimedia presentations using audio and images Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs Stream radio programs (select models only) or receive FM radio signals Create or burn audio CDs using an external optical drive Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphone, or a microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:

Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the correct jack on your computer. (Cable connectors are normally color-coded to match the corresponding jacks on the computer.) Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the record functions of the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to the desktop. 3. Open Windows Media Player and play back the sound. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Audio 35 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise.

To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, right-click the Sound icon on the taskbar, or select Start > Control Panel > Audio. 36 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Video Your computer enables you to use a variety of video features:

Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector The external monitor port connects an external display device such as an external monitor or a projector to the computer.

To connect a display device, connect the device cable to the external monitor port. If a properly connected external display device does not display an image, press fn+f2 to NOTE:

transfer the image to the device. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the computer display and the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Video 37 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Optical drive (select models only) Your computer may come with an external optical drive that expands the functionality of the computer. The external optical drive allows you to read data discs, play music, and watch movies. Identifying the external optical drive

Select Start > Computer. You will see a list of all the devices installed on your computer, including the connected external optical drive. You may have one of the following types of drives:

DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/CD-RW Combo Drive

NOTE: Some of the drives listed above may not be supported by your computer. Using optical discs An optical drive, such as a DVD-ROM drive, supports optical discs (CDs and DVDs). These discs store information, such as music, photos, and movies. DVDs have a higher storage capacity than CDs. The external optical drive can read standard CD and DVD discs. NOTE: Some of the optical drives listed may not be supported by your computer. The listed drives are not necessarily all of the supported optical drives. Some optical drives can also write to optical discs as described in the following table. Optical drive type Read from CD and DVD-ROM media Write to CD-R/RW media Write to DVD (includes DVD+R DL, DVDRW/

R, and DVD-ROM media) Write label to LightScribe CD or DVD DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/CD-RW Combo Drive Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of information, or loss of audio or video playback functionality, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading or writing to a CD or DVD. Selecting the right disc An optical drive supports optical discs (CDs and DVDs). CDs, used to store digital data, are also used for commercial audio recordings and are convenient for your personal storage needs. DVDs are used primarily for movies, software, and data backup purposes. DVDs are the same form factor as CDs but have 6 to 7 times the storage capacity. NOTE: The external optical drive connected to your computer may not support all the types of optical discs discussed in this section. 38 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 5. Gently press the disc (3) down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. 6. Close the disc tray. 7. If you have not yet configured AutoPlay, the AutoPlay dialog box opens and asks how you want to use the media content. Choose Windows Media Player, which is preinstalled on your computer. NOTE: After you insert a disc, a short pause is normal. If Sleep or Hibernation is accidentally initiated during playback of a disc:

Your playback may be interrupted. You may see a warning message asking if you want to continue. If this message is displayed, click No. You may need to restart the CD or DVD to resume playback. Watching a movie An external optical drive allows you to watch movies from a disc. NOTE: Be sure that the external optical drive is connected to your computer before beginning these steps. 1. 2. 3. Turn on the computer. Press the release button (1) on the external optical drive bezel to release the disc tray. Pull out the tray (2). 4. Hold the disc by the edges and position the disc label-side up over the tray spindle. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. 40 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Creating or burning a CD or DVD If your external optical drive is a CD-RW, DVD-RW, or DVDRW optical drive, you can use software such as Windows Media Player to burn data and audio files, including MP3 and WAV music files. To burn video files to a CD or DVD, use MyDVD. Observe the following guidelines when burning a CD or DVD:

Before burning a disc, save and close any open files and close all programs. A CD-R or DVD-R is usually best for burning audio files because after the information is copied, it cannot be changed. Because some home and car stereos will not play CD-RWs, use CD-Rs to burn music CDs. A CD-RW or DVD-RW is generally best for burning data files or for testing audio or video recordings before you burn them to a CD or DVD that cannot be changed. DVD players used in home systems usually do not support all DVD formats. Refer to the user guide that came with your DVD player for a list of supported formats. An MP3 file uses less space than other music file formats, and the process for creating an MP3 disc is the same as the process for creating a data file. MP3 files can be played only on MP3 players or on computers with MP3 software installed. To burn a CD or DVD, follow these steps:

1. Download or copy the source files into a folder on your hard drive. 2. 3. 4. Insert a blank CD or DVD into the external optical drive. Select Start > All Programs and the name of the software you want to use. Select the kind of CD or DVD you want to createdata, audio, or video. 5. Right-click Start, click Explore, and navigate to the folder where the source files are stored. 6. Open the folder, and then drag the files to the drive that contains the blank optical disc. 7. Initiate the burning process as directed by the program you have selected. For specific instructions, refer to the software manufacturer's instructions, which may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturer's Web site. CAUTION: Observe the copyright warning. It is a criminal offense, under applicable copyright laws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including computer programs, films, broadcasts, and sound recordings. Do not use this computer for such purposes. Removing an optical disc (CD or DVD) 1. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray, and then gently pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 42 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 2. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 3. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Optical drive (select models only) 43 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Webcam Your computer model includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam can be used with a variety of software for the following functions:

Capturing video Streaming video with instant message software Taking still photos

NOTE: For information about using software designed for use with the integrated webcam, refer to the online Help for that software. For optimum performance, observe the following guidelines while using the integrated webcam:

Be sure that you have the latest version of an instant message program before attempting a video conversation. The webcam may not work properly across some network firewalls. If you are having trouble viewing or sending multimedia files to someone on another LAN NOTE:

or outside your network firewall, temporarily disable the firewall, perform the task you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall as necessary, and adjust the policies and settings of other intrusion detection systems. For additional information, contact your network administrator or IT department.

Whenever possible, place bright light sources behind the webcam and out of the picture area. Adjusting webcam properties You can adjust webcam properties using the Properties dialog box, which is accessible from various programs that use the integrated webcam, usually from a configuration, settings, or properties menu:

BrightnessControls the amount of light that is incorporated into the image. A higher brightness setting creates a brighter image; a lower brightness setting creates a darker image. ContrastControls the difference between lighter and darker areas on the image. A higher contrast setting intensifies the image; a lower contrast setting maintains more of the original informations dynamic range but leads to a flatter image. HueControls the aspect of color that distinguishes it from another color (what makes a color red, green, or blue). Hue is distinct from saturation, which measures the intensity of the hue. SaturationControls the strength of color in the final image. A higher saturation setting creates a bolder image; a lower saturation setting creates a more subtle image. SharpnessControls the definition of edges in an image. A higher sharpness setting creates a more defined image; a lower sharpness setting creates a softer image. GammaControls the contrast affecting the mid-level grays or midtones of an image. Adjusting the gamma of an image allows you to change the brightness values of the middle range of gray tones without dramatically altering the shadows and highlights. A lower gamma setting makes grays look black, and makes dark colors even darker. For information about using the webcam, select Start > Help and Support. 44 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 5 Security Protecting the computer NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE:

In some countries or regions, the computer supports CompuTrace, which is an online-security-

based tracking and recovery service. If the computer is stolen, CompuTrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service in order to use CompuTrace. For information about ordering the CompuTrace software, see the HP Web site at http://www.hpshopping.com. Security features provided with your computer can protect the computer, personal information, and data from a variety of risks. The way you use your computer will determine which security features you need to use. The Windows operating system offers certain security features. Additional security features are listed in the following table. Most of these additional security features can be configured in the Computer Setup utility. To protect against Use this security feature Unauthorized use of the computer Power-on authentication using passwords or smart cards Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (f10) Setup password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized reset of Computer Setup (f10) passwords Stringent security feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optical drive, diskette drive, or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to data

Firewall software

Windows updates Unauthorized access to Computer Setup settings and other system identification information Setup password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable)

*Computer Setup is a non-Windows utility accessed by pressing f10 when the computer is turned on or restarted. When using Computer Setup, you must use the keys on your computer to navigate and make selections. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Protecting the computer 45 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Computer Setup utility that is preinstalled on the computer. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the computer, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Computer Setup feature. Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Computer Setup:

A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in Computer Setup must be entered at a Computer Setup prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program.

Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the computer.

Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider.

The following sections list Windows and Computer Setup passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Windows Windows passwords Administrator password*

User password*

Function Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Computer Setup Computer Setup passwords Function Setup password Power-on password Protects access to Computer Setup. Protects access to the computer contents when the computer turns on, restarts, or exits Hibernation. 46 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Computer Setup passwords DriveLock master password DriveLock user password Setup password Function Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock. It is also used to remove DriveLock protection. This password is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. The Computer Setup setup password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Computer Setup. After this password is set, it must be entered to access Computer Setup and to make changes using Computer Setup. Note the following characteristics of the setup password:

It is not interchangeable with a Windows administrator password, although both passwords can be identical. It is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. It must be set and entered with the same keys. For example, a setup password set with keyboard number keys will not be recognized if you enter it thereafter with embedded numeric keypad number keys. It can include any combination of up to 32 letters and numbers and is not case sensitive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 47 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Managing a setup password A setup password is set, changed, and deleted in Computer Setup. To manage, set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Setup Password, and then press enter.

To set a setup password, type your password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To change a setup password, type your current password in the Old password field, type a new password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To delete a setup password, type your current password in the Old password field, and then press f10. 3. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. 48 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Entering a setup password At the Setup password prompt, type your setup password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the setup password, you must restart the computer and try again. Power-on password The Computer Setup power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer. After this password is set, it must be entered each time the computer is turned on. Note the following characteristics of a power-on password:

It is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. It must be set and entered with the same keys. For example, a power-on password set with keyboard number keys will not be recognized if you enter it thereafter with embedded numeric keypad number keys. It can include any combination of up to 32 letters and numbers and is not case sensitive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 49 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Managing a power-on password A power-on password is set, changed, and deleted in Computer Setup. To manage, set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Power-On password, and then press enter.

To set a power-on password, type the password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To change a power-on password, type the current password in the Old password field, type the new password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To delete a power-on password, type the current password in the Old password field, and then press f10. 3. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. 50 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Entering a power-on password At the Power-on Password prompt, type your password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must turn off the computer, turn it back on, and then try again. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 51 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Requiring a power-on password at restart In addition to requiring that a power-on password be entered each time the computer is turned on, you can also require that a power-on password be entered each time the computer is restarted. To enable and disable this feature in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Password options, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select Enable or Disable in the Require password on restart field, and then press f10. 4. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Using Computer Setup DriveLock CAUTION: To prevent the DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drive(s) of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, a password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer, not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay, in order for it to be accessed by the DriveLock passwords. To apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, a user password and a master password must be set in Computer Setup. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, the hard drive can be accessed only by entering either the user password or the master password. The owner of the user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The user password and the master password can be identical. You can delete a user password or master password only by removing DriveLock protection from the drive. DriveLock protection can be removed from the drive only with the master password. NOTE: When your power-on password and DriveLock user password are identical, you will be prompted to enter only a power-on password instead of both a power-on password and a DriveLock user password. 52 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Setting a DriveLock password To access the DriveLock settings in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 3. Select the location of the hard drive you want to protect, and then press f10. 4. Use the arrow keys to select Enable in the Protection field, and then press f10. 5. Read the warning. To continue, press f10. 6. 7. 8. 9. Type your user password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. Type your master password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To confirm DriveLock protection on the drive you have selected, type DriveLock in the confirmation field, and then press f10. To exit DriveLock settings, use the arrow keys to select Esc. 10. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 53 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 2 incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. 54 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Changing a DriveLock password To access the DriveLock settings in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the location of the internal hard drive, and then press f10. 4. Use the arrow keys to select the field for the password you want to change. Type your current password in the Old password field, and then type the new password in the New password field and in the Verify new password field. Then press f10. 5. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 55 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Removing DriveLock protection To access the DriveLock settings in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the location of the internal hard drive, and then press f10. 4. Use the arrow keys to select Disable in the Protection field, and then press f10. 5. 6. Type your master password in the Old password field. Then press f10. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. 56 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using Computer Setup security features Securing system devices From the Boot options menu or the Port options menu in Computer Setup, you can disable or enable system devices. To disable or reenable system devices in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Boot options or System Configuration

> Port options. Then press enter and use the arrow keys to select the options you want. 3. 4. To confirm your preferences, press f10. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Using Computer Setup stringent security CAUTION: To prevent the computer from becoming permanently unusable, record your configured setup password, power-on password, or smart card PIN in a safe place away from your computer. Without these passwords or PIN, the computer cannot be unlocked. The stringent security feature enhances power-on security by forcing user authentication with your configured setup password, power-on password, or smart card PIN before granting access to the system. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Computer Setup security features 57 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Setting stringent security To enable stringent security in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Password options, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select Enable in the Stringent security field. 4. Read the warning. To continue, press f10. 5. 6. To enable the feature each time the computer is turned on, press f10. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. 58 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Removing stringent security To remove stringent security in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Password options and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select Disable in the Stringent security field, and then press f10. 4. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Viewing Computer Setup System Information The System Information feature in Computer Setup provides 2 types of system information:

Identification information about the computer model. Specification information for the processor, cache and memory size, and system ROM.

To view this general system information, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select File > System Information, and then press enter. NOTE: To prevent unauthorized access to this information, you must create a setup password in Computer Setup. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Computer Setup security features 59 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you expose the computer to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be updated. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer. For information about using the Norton Internet Security software, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. 60 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using firewall software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to information about you, the computer, and your personal files. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the computer to protect your privacy. Firewall features include information on logging and reporting, and automatic alarms to monitor all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall documentation or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily solve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using firewall software 61 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Installing critical updates CAUTION: To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install the online critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update monthly to install the latest software from Microsoft. Obtain updates, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. 62 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Installing a security cable NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the cable lock (2). Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the cable lock with the key. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing a security cable 63 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 6 External devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. Your computer model has 2 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. A USB hub provides additional USB ports that can be used with the computer. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device.

To connect a USB device to the computer, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: The first time you connect a USB device, a message is displayed in the notification area to let you know the device is recognized by the computer. Stopping and removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop a USB device before removing it. 64 Chapter 6 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. To stop and remove a USB device:

1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or

<<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE:

If the USB device is not listed, you do not have to stop the device before you remove it. 3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 4. Remove the device. Using USB legacy support USB legacy support (enabled by default) permits the following actions:

Using a USB keyboard, mouse, or hub connected to a USB port on the computer during startup or in an MS-DOS-based program or utility Starting or restarting from an optional external MultiBay or an optional USB bootable device

USB legacy support is enabled at the factory. To disable or enable USB legacy support:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Device configurations, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to enable or disable USB legacy support, and then press f10. 4. To save your preferences and exit Computer Setup, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a USB device 65 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. A USB drive can be added by connecting the drive to a USB port on the computer. NOTE: HP external USB optical drives should be connected to the powered USB port on the left side of the computer. USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/CD-RW Combo Drive

MultiBay device Using optional external devices NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external device to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device to the computer. 2. 3. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Using an optional external MultiBay II An external MultiBay II connects to a USB port on the computer and enables you to use MultiBay II devices. The computer provides one powered USB port on the left side of the computer. This port provides power to the external MultiBay when used with a powered USB cable. An external MultiBay connected to the other USB port on the computer must be connected to AC power. For more information about the external MultiBay II, refer to the user guide that is included with the device. 66 Chapter 6 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using an optional external optical drive (select models only) An external optical drive connects to a USB port on the computer and enables you to use optical discs

(CDs and DVDs). The computer provides one powered USB port on the left side of the computer. This port provides power to the external optical drive when used with a powered USB cable. An external optical drive connected to the other USB port on the computer must be connected to AC power. An external optical drive, such as a DVD-ROM drive, supports optical discs (CDs and DVDs). These discs store or transport information and play music and movies. DVDs have a higher storage capacity than CDs. All optical drives can read from optical discs and some drives can also write to optical discs as described in the following table. Optical drive type Read from CD and DVD-ROM media Write to CD-R/RW media Write to DVD

(includes DVD+R DL, DVDRW/R, and DVD-

RAM media) Write label to LightScribe CD or DVD DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/CD-RW Combo Drive Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No NOTE: Some of the optical drives listed may not be supported by your computer. The listed drives are not necessarily all of the supported optical drives. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, or loss of audio or video playback functionality, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a CD or DVD. To prevent loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation when writing to a CD or DVD. If Sleep or Hibernation is initiated during playback of a disc, you may experience the following behaviors:

Your playback may be interrupted. You may see a warning message asking if you want to continue. If this message is displayed, click No. You may need to restart the CD or DVD to resume audio and video playback. Inserting an optical disc (CD or DVD) 1. 2. 3. Turn on the computer. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray. Pull out the tray (2). 4. Hold the disc by the edges to avoid touching the flat surfaces and position the disc label-side up over the tray spindle. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using an optional external optical drive (select models only) 67 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 5. Gently press the disc (3) down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. 6. Close the disc tray. Removing an optical disc (CD or DVD) There are 2 ways to remove a disc, depending on whether the disc tray opens normally or not. When the disc tray opens 1. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray, and then gently pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 2. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 3. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. 68 Chapter 6 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review When the disc tray does not open 1. 2. Insert the end of a paper clip (1) into the release access in the front bezel of the drive. Press in gently on the paper clip until the tray is released, and then pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 3. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 4. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using an optional external optical drive (select models only) 69 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 7 External media cards Using SD Card Reader cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other computers. The SD Card Reader supports the following formats:

MultiMediaCard (MMC)

Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the computer, do not insert any type of adapter into the SD Card Reader. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 2. Insert the card into the SD Card Reader, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of available options may be displayed. 70 Chapter 7 External media cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Stopping and removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, stop a digital card before removing it. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. Stop the digital card:

a. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon

(< or <<) in the notification area. b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. c. Click Stop, and then click OK. 3. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using SD Card Reader cards 71 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Using pointing devices Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:

If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the computer using one of the USB ports on the computer. A USB mouse can also be connected to the system using the ports on an optional docking device or expansion product. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and either the esc key (2) or one of the function keys (3). The icons on the f1 through f4 and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. 72 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Function Display system information. Initiate Sleep. Alternate between computer display and external display. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute or restore computer sound. Decrease computer sound. Increase computer sound. Hotkey fn+esc fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the computer keyboard, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Displaying system information (fn+esc) Press fn+esc to display information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number. In the Windows fn+esc display, the version of the system BIOS (basic input-output system) is displayed as the BIOS date. On some computer models, the BIOS date is displayed in decimal format. The BIOS date is sometimes called the system ROM version number. Initiating Sleep (fn+f1) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the keyboard 73 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Press fn+f1 to initiate Sleep. When Sleep is initiated, your information is stored in system memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the computer is in the Sleep state, the power lights blink. The computer must be on before you can initiate Sleep. If a critical battery level occurs while the computer is in the Sleep state, the computer initiates NOTE:

Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To exit Sleep, briefly slide the power switch or press any key on the keyboard. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep. NOTE:

hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 74 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Switching the screen image (fn+f2) Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the computer. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:

LCD (computer display) External VGA (most external monitors) S-Video (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with S-Video-in jacks) HDMI (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with HDMI ports) Composite video (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with composite-video-in jacks) NOTE: Composite devices and S-Video devices can be connected to the system only by using an optional docking device. Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f3) Press fn+f3 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness (fn+f4) Press fn+f4 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the computer cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the computer. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the computer. Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the keyboard 75 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. Using keypads The computer has an embedded numeric keypad and also supports an optional external numeric keypad or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. Component

(1) fn key Description Alternates the functions of the keys on the embedded numeric keypad when pressed in combination with a keypad key or the shift key.

(2)

(3) Embedded numeric keypad Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. num lk key Enables the embedded numeric keypad. Using the embedded numeric keypad The 15 keys of the embedded numeric keypad can be used like the keys on an external keypad. When the embedded numeric keypad is turned on, each key on the keypad performs the function indicated by the icon in the upper-right corner of the key. Enabling and disabling the embedded numeric keypad Press fn+num lk to enable the embedded numeric keypad. Press fn+num lk again to return the keys to their standard keyboard functions. 76 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard Dirt and grease on the TouchPad can cause the pointer to jump around on the screen. To avoid this, clean the TouchPad with a damp cloth, and wash your hands frequently when using the computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. 78 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 9 Drives Identifying installed drives To view the drives installed on the computer, select Start > Computer. On models with a secondary hard drive (drive D), the optical drive becomes drive E. The next drive added to the system, such as a new USB drive, will be assigned the next available drive letter. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Handling drives Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying installed drives 79 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while an optional optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. 80 Chapter 9 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Improving HD performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use the computer, files on the hard drive become fragmented. Disk Defragmenter consolidates the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. 2. Click Defragment now. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Improving HD performance 81 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects the hard drive by parking the drive and halting I/O requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power.

A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Hard drives that are in an optional docking device or are connected to a USB port are not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, refer to the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The drive light on the computer changes to an amber color to show that the drive is parked. To determine whether drives are currently protected or whether a drive is parked, use Mobility Center:

If the software is enabled, a green check mark is superimposed over the hard drive icon. If the software is disabled, a red X is superimposed over the hard drive icon. If the drives are parked, a yellow moon is superimposed over the hard drive icon.

NOTE: The icon in the Mobility Center may not show the most up-to-date status for the drive. For immediate updates after a change in status, you need to enable the notification area icon. To enable the notification area icon:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP 3D DriveGuard. 2. Next to Icon in System Tray, click Show. 3. Click OK. If HP 3D DriveGuard has parked the drive, the computer will behave in the following ways:

The computer will not shut down. The computer will not initiate Sleep or Hibernation, except as described in the following Note. NOTE:

DriveGuard allows the computer to initiate Hibernation. If the computer is running on battery power and reaches a critical battery level, HP 3D The computer will not activate battery alarms set on the Alarms tab in Power Options properties.

Before you move the computer, HP recommends that you either shut it down or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. 82 Chapter 9 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using HP 3D DriveGuard software The HP 3D DriveGuard software enables you to perform the following tasks:

Enable and disable HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Depending on your user privileges, you may not be able to enable or disable HP 3D DriveGuard. Additionally, members of an Administrator group can change the privileges for non-

Administrator users. Determine whether a drive in the system is supported.

To open the software and change settings, follow these steps:

1. In Mobility Center, click the hard drive icon to open the HP 3D DriveGuard window. or Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP 3D DriveGuard. 2. Click the appropriate button to change settings. 3. Click OK. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) 83 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Replacing a hard drive CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Shut down the computer before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by briefly sliding the power switch. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. To remove a hard drive:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. 3. Disconnect all external hardware devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. Remove the 3 screws from the back edge of the computer. new image 8. Turn the computer display-side up, with the front toward you, and open the display. 84 Chapter 9 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 6. Replace the 3 screws on the back edge of the computer. 7. Replace the battery. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Replacing a hard drive 87 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 9. Remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:

CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. a. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, do not bend the memory module. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

89 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. 11. Align the tabs (1) on the memory module compartment cover with the notches on the computer. 12. Close the cover (2). 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the computer. 90 Chapter 10 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 11 Computer Setup Starting Computer Setup Computer Setup is a preinstalled, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. NOTE: Some of the Computer Setup menu items listed in this guide may not be supported by your computer. NOTE: Pointing devices are not supported in Computer Setup. You must use the keyboard to navigate and make selections. NOTE: An external keyboard connected by USB can be used with Computer Setup only if USB legacy support is enabled. To start Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer. Before your operating system opens and while the F10=ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press f10. Using Computer Setup Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup The information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security, Diagnostics, and System Configuration menus. 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the

"F10 = ROM Based Setup" message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Because Computer Setup is not operating system based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke:

To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To select an item, press enter. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Starting Computer Setup 91 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review

To view navigation information, press f1. To change the language, press f2.

Select the File, Security, Diagnostics, or System Configuration menu. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

2. 3.

To exit Computer Setup without saving your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File

> Ignore changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. To save your preferences and exit Computer Setup, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the

"F10 = ROM Based Setup" message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select File > Restore defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the confirmation dialog box opens, press f10. 4. To save your preferences and exit Computer Setup, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Computer Setup menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of the Computer Setup options. NOTE: Some of the Computer Setup menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your computer. File menu Select System information Restore defaults To do this

View identification information for the computer. View specification information for the processor, cache and memory size, and system ROM. Replace the configuration settings in Computer Setup with the original factory settings. (Password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings.) 92 Chapter 11 Computer Setup Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Select Ignore changes and exit Save changes and exit Security menu To do this Cancel any changes entered during the current session. Then exit and restart the computer. Save any changes entered during the current session. Then exit and restart the computer. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Some of the menu items listed in this section may not be supported by your computer. Select Setup password Power-on password Password options DriveLock passwords System IDs Disk Sanitizer Diagnostics menu Select HDD Self-Test Options Memory Check To do this Enter, change, or delete a setup password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password.

Enable/disable stringent security. Enable/disable the password requirement on computer restart. Enable, change, or disable DriveLock on any computer hard drive. Enter, change, or disable DriveLock on an optional MultiBay hard drive. NOTE: DriveLock settings are accessible only when you enter Computer Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. Enter a user-defined computer asset tracking number and ownership tag. Run Disk Sanitizer to destroy all existing data on the primary hard drive. The following options are available:

Fast: Runs the Disk Sanitizer erase cycle once. Optimum: Runs the Disk Sanitizer erase cycle 3 times. Custom: Allows you to select the desired number of Disk Sanitizer erase cycles from a list. CAUTION:

hard drive is destroyed permanently. If you run Disk Sanitizer, the data on the primary To do this Run a comprehensive self-test on any hard drive in the system or on any optional MultiBay hard drive. Run a comprehensive check on system memory. Computer Setup menus 93 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review System Configuration menu NOTE: Some of the listed System Configuration options may not be supported by your computer. Select Language Boot options Device configurations To do this Change the Computer Setup language.

Set an f9, f10, and f12 delay when starting up. Enable/disable CD-ROM boot. Enable/disable floppy boot. Enable/disable internal network adapter boot. Enable/disable MultiBoot, which sets a boot order that can include most boot devices in the system. Set the Express Boot Popup delay in seconds. Set the boot order.

1st boot device: USB CD-ROM 2nd boot device: USB floppy 3rd boot device: USB SuperDisk 4th boot device: Notebook hard drive 5th boot device: USB hard disk 6th boot device: Network controller Swap the functions of the fn key and left ctrl key. Enable/disable USB legacy support. When enabled, USB legacy support allows the following:

Use of a USB keyboard in Computer Setup even when a your operating system is not running. Startup from bootable USB devices, including a hard drive, diskette drive, or optical drive connected by a USB port to the computer. Enable/disable BIOS DMA data transfers. Enable/disable fan always on while connected to an AC outlet. Enable/disable data execution prevention. Enable/disable LAN power saving mode. Enable/disable SATA Native Mode. Enable/disable Dual Core CPU. Enable/disable HDD translation mode. 94 Chapter 11 Computer Setup Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Select Built-in device options Port options To do this

Enable/disable embedded WLAN Device Radio. Enable/disable embedded Bluetooth Device Radio. Enable/disable Network Interface Controller (NIC) Enable/disable LAN/WLAN Switching. Enable/disable Wake on LAN. Enable/disable the integrated camera (webcam) Enable/disable USB port. Enable/disable ExpressCard slot. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Computer Setup menus 95 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Index A AC adapter connecting 14 identifying 9 administrator password 46 airport security devices 80 antennas 8 applications key, Windows 5 audio devices, connecting external 35 audio functions, checking 35 audio-in (microphone) jack 6, 32 audio-out (headphone) jack 6, 32 B battery calibrating 19 charging 17, 19 conserving power 22 disposing 23 inserting 16 low battery levels 18 recharging 22 removing 16 replacing 23 storing 22 battery bay 8, 10 battery charge maximizing 18 battery light 17, 18 battery power 15 battery release latches 16 battery release latches, identifying 8 battery temperature 22 battery, identifying 9 bays, battery 10 Bluetooth device 25 Bluetooth label 10 boot options 94 boot order 94 button, volume mute 32 buttons power 4 QuickLook 4 QuickWeb 4 buttons, TouchPad 2 C cables USB 64 calibrating battery 19 caps lock light, identifying 3 CD inserting 39, 67 removing 42, 68 CD drive 38, 66 Certificate of Authenticity label 10 charging batteries 17, 19 checking audio functions 35 components additional hardware 9 bottom 8 display 7 front 5 left-side 7 right-side 6 top 1 composite video 75 Computer Setup device security 57 Diagnostics menu 93 DriveLock password 52 File menu 92 navigating and selecting 91 power-on password 49 restoring factory settings 92 Security menu 93 setup password 47 stringent security 57 System Configuration menu 94 connecting to a WLAN 29 connection, external power 14 connector, power 7 conservation, power 22 cord, power 9 corporate WLAN connection 29 critical battery level 18 D device security 57 Diagnostics menu 93 digital card inserting 70 removing 71 stopping 71 Disk Cleanup software 81 Disk Defragmenter software 81 diskette drive 66 display image, switching 75 screen brightness hotkeys 75 display components 7 drive light 5, 82 drive media 11 DriveLock password drives changing 55 description 52 entering 54 removing 56 setting 53 diskette 66 external 66 hard 66, 85 MultiBay 66 optical 66 drives, boot order 94 96 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review drives, optical drive 38 DVD changing region setting 41 inserting 39, 67 removing 42, 68 DVD drive 38, 66 DVD region settings 41 E earbuds 32 embedded numeric keypad keys, identifying 5 encryption 28 esc key, identifying 5 external audio devices, connecting 35 external drive 66 external monitor port 37 external monitor port, identifying 7 F File menu 92 firewall 28 fn key 72 fn key, identifying 5 function keys 72 function keys, identifying 5 H hard disk drive external 66 HP 3D DriveGuard 82 installing 85 hard drive external 66 HP 3D DriveGuard 82 installing 85 hardware, identifying 1 HDMI 75 headphone (audio-out) jacks 32 headphones 32 Hibernation exiting 12 initiated during critical battery level 18 initiating 12 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 75 decreasing speaker sound 76 description 72 displaying system information 73 increasing screen brightness 75 increasing speaker volume 76 initiating QuickLock 75 initiating Sleep 74 muting speaker sound 75 switching screen image 75 using 73 HP 3D DriveGuard 82 hubs 64 I icons network status 25 wireless 25 internal microphone, identifying 32 internal microphones, identifying 8 Internet connection setup 27 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 6, 32 audio-out (headphone) 6, 32 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 72 keypad, embedded enabling and disabling 76 identifying 76 switching key functions 77 using 76 keypad, external num lock 77 using 77 keys esc 5 fn 5 function 5 keypad 5 Windows applications 5 Windows logo 5 L labels Bluetooth 10 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 10 regulatory 10 service tag 8, 10 wireless certification 10 WLAN 10 latches, battery release 8 legacy support, USB 91, 94 light, drive 82 lights caps lock 3 drive 5 power 3, 7 QuickLook 3 QuickWeb 3 webcam 8, 32 wireless 6 low battery level 18 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 81 Disk Defragmenter 81 memory module inserting 89 removing 89 memory module compartment, identifying 8 microphones, internal 8, 32 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 10 monitor port, external 7 monitor, connecting 37 mouse, external connecting 72 setting preferences 72 movie, watching 40 MultiBay 66 multimedia components, identifying 31 multimedia software 34 MultiMediaCard 70 mute button 32 N network status icon 25 num lock, external keypad 77 Index 97 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 10 Product Key 10 optical disc inserting 39, 67 removing 42, 68 optical discs, using 38 optical drive 38, 66 P passwords administrator 46 DriveLock 52 power-on 49 setup 47 user 46 pointing devices setting preferences 72 external monitor 7, 37 USB 6, 7, 64 ports power connecting 14 conserving 22 power button, identifying 4 power connector, identifying 7 power cord, identifying 9 power light 7 power light, identifying 3 power plans 12 Product Key 10 product name and number, computer 8, 10 projector, connecting 37 public WLAN connection 29 Q QuickLock hotkey 75 QuickLook button, identifying 4 QuickLook light, identifying 3 QuickWeb button, identifying 4 QuickWeb light, identifying 3 R readable media 11 region codes, DVD 41 regulatory information regulatory label 10 wireless certification labels 10 98 Index release latches, battery 8 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 S S-Video 75 screen brightness hotkeys 75 screen image, switching 75 scrolling regions, TouchPad 2 SD Card 70 SD Card Reader 6, 70 security cable slot, identifying 6 Security menu 93 security, wireless 27 serial number, computer 8, 10 service tag 8, 10 setup of WLAN 27 setup utility Diagnostics menu 93 File menu 92 navigating and selecting 91 restoring factory settings 92 Security menu 93 System Configuration menu 94 setup, computer 1 shut down 24 Sleep exiting 11 initiating 11 Sleep hotkey 74 slots security cable 6 software Disk Cleanup 81 Disk Defragmenter 81 speakers 32 speakers, identifying 6, 8 storing battery 22 stringent security 57, 93 switches wireless 6 System Configuration menu 94 system fan 94 system information 92 system information hotkey 73 T temperature 22 TouchPad buttons 2 identifying 2 scrolling regions 2 using 72 traveling with the computer 10, 22 turning off the computer 24 U unresponsive system 24 USB cable, connecting 64 USB devices connecting 64 description 64 removing 64 stopping 64 USB hubs 64 USB legacy support 65, 91, 94 USB port, powered 66, 67 USB ports, identifying 6, 7, 64 user password 46 V vents, identifying 7, 8 video transmission types 75 video, recording 8 volume hotkeys 32 volume mute button 32 volume, adjusting 32 W webcam 8, 32 webcam light, identifying 8, 32 webcam properties, adjusting 44 Windows applications key, identifying 5 Windows logo key, identifying 5 wireless antennas 8 wireless certification label 10 wireless controls button 26 operating system 26 wireless icon 25 wireless light 6, 26 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 29 corporate WLAN connection 29 equipment needed 27 functional range 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review public WLAN connection 29 security 27 wireless switch 6, 26 WLAN device 10, 25, 27 WLAN label 10 writable media 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 99 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

Introduction: Broadcom BCM943224HMS PCI-E Mini Card User's Guide Before you begin Things you should know BCM943224HMS network Before you begin Obtain the following information from your network administrator (if you are a home user, obtain this information from the person that installed your wireless access point):

l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks that you want to connect to. l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks you want to connect to. l For Microsoft Windows networking, your customer name and workgroup name. l For your network account, your user name and password. l Your IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Things you should know When you start your computer, your Broadcom BCM943224HMS PCI-E Mini card detects certain wireless networks that are within range. Before you can connect to these and other wireless networks, you must configure a profile for each network using the information you obtained from your network administrator. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in the IEEE 802.11g standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network you are connecting to has enabled WEP, you must also enable WEP in the network profile and set the WEP key to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, you cannot connect to the network. Broadcom BCM943224HMS network The Broadcom BCM943224HMS solution allows you to make a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated below. Back to top Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Back to Contents Page Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Overview Utility Components Overview The Broadcom Wireless Utility enables you to do the following network tasks:

l Manage your wireless networks and create network connection profiles (Wireless Networks tab) l Connect to available networks (utility icon in notification area) l Get information about the network status and signal and noise of your network connection (Link Status tab) l View current and accumulated statistics (Statistics tab) l Find out which broadcasting networks are in range and search for nonbroadcasting networks (Site Monitor tab) l Run tests on the wireless network adapter (Diagnostics tab) l Get date and version information about the utility, and software, hardware, and location details about your wireless network adapter (Information tab) l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes (Wireless Networks tab) l Manually import EAP-FAST PACs (Wireless Networks tab) In the utility, you can open Wireless Network Wizard to connect to a basic network or create an ad hoc network, or you can open the Wireless Network Connection Settings tool to connect to an advanced network. To do any of the other tasks, click the tab that is associated with the described task. To start using the utility, right-click the utility icon If the icon is not available, open Broadcom Wireless Utility in Control Panel. in the notification area, and then click Open Utility. NOTE: The utility icon may not appear exactly as shown here. See "Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon."

Utility Components Utility components include the utility icon in the notification area, the six utility tabs, and Wireless Network Connection Settings. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (1 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Utility Icon To do any of the following tasks or operations, right-click the utility icon, and then click the appropriate item. l Open the on-line Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide

(Help Files) l Open About WLAN Card Utility to view links to Broadcom and Broadcom Customer Support websites and to view the version and date of the utility (About) l Hide the utility icon (Hide Tray Icon) l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Connect to any of the networks for which you have created a connection profile and are within range (Connect To) l Open the utility to the Wireless Networks tab (Open Utility) l Open the utility to the Link Status tab to view information about the connection (Status) l Display a log of your wireless network events (Display Log) Wireless Networks Tab The Wireless Networks tab has tools that enable you to do the following:

l Use the utility to manage your wireless networks l Add a network connection profile l Edit or remove a network connection profile l Change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections l Connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Show or hide the utility icon in the notification area l Choose which type of network to access l Lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile l Save your wireless network connection profiles as a WPN file l Import a WPN file l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes l Manually import EAP-FAST PACS On the Add menu, you can use either the wireless network wizard that is available from Broadcom Wireless Utility (see Connecting to a Basic Network or Creating an Ad Hoc Network Using the Wireless Network Wizard") or the utility (see "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility") to add a network connection profile. To use the utility to manage your wireless networks, select the Let this tool manage your wireless networks check box. To add a network connection profile, click the Add arrow, and then click either Use Wizard (basic network) or Use Utility (advanced network). To edit or remove a network connection profile, right-click the network name, and then click either Edit or Remove. To change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections, click the network name, and then click either the up arrow or down arrow. To connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list, right-click the network name, and then click Connect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (2 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide To disable the radio, clear the Enable radio check box. To enable the radio, select the Enable radio check box. To hide the utility icon utility icon check box.

, clear the Show utility icon check box. To show the icon, select the Show To choose the type of network to access, click the Options arrow, and then click Advanced. To lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the network name, and then click Lock or Unlock, as appropriate. NOTE: You must have system or administrator rights to be able to lock or unlock a profile. To save your wireless network connection profiles to a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Export (see "Saving Preferred Network Connection Settings to a File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

To import a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Import (see "Importing a Preferred Network Connection Profiles File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

Click Apply or OK after you change any of the settings for the change to take effect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (3 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide For networks that use the EAP-FAST authentication method, the Wireless WLAN Card Utility automatically adds trusted servers to the trust list and accepts auto-provisioning and AID (A-ID) group changes by default. The utility also enables you to import a Protected Access Credential (PAC). From the utility, you can also manually add or delete trusted servers, enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes, or import or delete PACS, as described in the following instructions. In general, you should use the default settings. Therefore, check with the network administrator before you make any changes. To manually add a trusted server to the trust list 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Click Add. 4. Type the A-ID friendly name of the trusted server in the space provided, and then click OK. To delete a trusted server from the trust list file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (4 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. In the Trust list (A-ID), click the name of the trusted server you want to delete, and then click Delete. To change the default settings for administering Cisco Compatible Extensions 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Clear the Disable auto-provision prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or rejection. 4. Clear the Disable A-ID group change prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or 5. Select the Auto-provision PAC only once check box to auto-provision a Protected Access rejection. Credential (PAC) only once. To import or remove an EAP-FAST PAC 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and 3. To import a PAC: in Protected Access Credentials, click Add, and then follow the on-screen then click Manage PACs. instructions. NOTE: The PAC is password protected, so you must know the password to be able to import the PAC.

-or-

To remove a PAC: click anywhere in the row that lists the PAC, and then click Remove. Link Status Network status and signal and noise information about your network connection is displayed on the Link Status tab. NOTES:

l For IEEE 802.11n connections, speed is indicated by an MCS value. l Radio Stream information is provided only for IEEE 802.11n connections. l Click anywhere in the Signal & noise history box to change the type of history being displayed. Successive clicks change the type from both signal and noise, to noise only, to signal only, and back to both signal and noise. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (5 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The status of your network connection is also indicated by the appearance of the utility icon number and color of the radio waves indicates the strength or weakness of the signal (see Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon for details). The To view the network name (SSID), speed, signal strength rating, connection status, and the client IP address of the network connection, move your mouse pointer over the utility icon. NOTE: On computers running Windows XP, you also can view the SSID, speed, signal strength rating, and connection status by moving your mouse pointer over the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the notification area. Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (6 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Icon Appearance Indicated Received Signal Strength The signal strength is very good or excellent. The signal strength is weak. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. No signal is being received. See Troubleshooting for probable causes and suggested action. The radio is disabled or switched off. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. Statistics On the Statistics tab under Current, the following current statistics are shown:

l Network name (SSID) l Connection time l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost l Total packets lost (%) Under Accumulated, the following accumulated statistics are shown:

l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (7 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Site Monitor Basic Site Monitor On the Site Monitor tab, the basic Site Monitor displays information about wireless routers/APs and ad hoc networks that are within range. To sort the list, click the column heading that shows the characteristic you want to sort by. For example, to sort by signal strength, click Signal . To view information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network. The network information is shown under Selected Network. To view or change the network connection settings for a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Editif you have not yet created a network connection profile for that particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network and want to do so, click Add . To see the information elements for a listed AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the AP or ad hoc network, and then click Show Information Elements. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (8 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide NOTES:

l Nonbroadcasting networks are labeled (nonbroadcasting) under Network Name. l The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting APs to which you are not currently connected. l The symbols under AP Band indicate IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, or IEEE 802.11n operation. To see more detailed information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Advanced. Advanced Site Monitor To save the activity log to a file, click the Options arrow, and then click Start Log. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (9 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide You can adjust the time interval between scans by clicking the Options arrow, and then clicking either one of the preset values or clicking Customize to specify a different time interval. NOTE: The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting networks to which you are not currently connected. To view detailed network information for a single nonbroadcasting network, type the network name in the Look for box, and then click Find. To reset the site monitor to the broadcasting networks, click Clear. Diagnostics On the Diagnostics tab, you can run a number of tests to determine if your wireless network adapter is functioning properly. Select the tests you want to run, and then click Run. For information about an individual test, look under Information before you click Run. To see the test results, look under Information after you click Run. NOTE: The network connection is lost when you run the tests. When the test run is over, your network connection is automatically reestablished. Also, you can view a log of your wireless network events. To do so, click Log. Examples of wireless network events that are logged include:

file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (10 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide l Initiation of user session l Connecting to a network l Disconnecting from current network l Authentication mode being used l Driver status l Supplicant status l New wireless device available l Initializing wireless state machine l Wireless utility is managing this adapter l Wireless utility is not managing this adapter If your Broadcom 802.11 Network Adapter fails any of the diagnostics tests, go to http://www.broadcom. com/ for technical support. Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (11 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The following information is displayed on the Information tab:

l Software details l Hardware details l Location details (shows the country for which the driver is installed and the channels supported for that location) Wireless Network Connection Settings The Wireless Network Connection Settings component is intended for use by advanced users or network administrators. You can use Wireless Network Connection Settings to create a connection profile for an advanced infrastructure network, a basic infrastructure network, or an ad hoc network (see " Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility"). Back to Contents Page file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (12 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Regulatory Statements for BCM943224HMS USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. CAUTION This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. Host product must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041". Canada Industry Canada (IC) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution:

This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed below, and having a maximum gain of 3.9 dBi @ 2.4GHz and 5.8dBi@5GHz. Antennas not included in this list or having a gain greater than 3.9 dBi @ 2.4GHz and 5.8dBi@5GHz are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. 0984 symbol and can be used throughout the This equipment is marked with the European community. This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:

EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 893 - Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN); 5 GHz high performance RLAN;

Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 62311: 2008 Assessment of electronic and electrical equipment related to human exposure restrictions for electromagnetic fields (0 Hz - 300 GHz) Marking by the symbol France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

indicates that usage restrictions apply. Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band 802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (51505350 MHz). - DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point in installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Taiwan NCC warning statement 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission granted, the frequency change, transmitting power enhance or alter of original design characteristic as well as function by company, enterprise, or user for approved Low-power radio frequency devices is not allowed. Article 14 Low-power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found, shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved. Above mentioned Legal Communications is defined as radio communications operation follows Telecommunications Act. Low-power radio-frequency devices must susceptible with the interference from legal communications, ISM radio wave radiated devices. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz .

 

 

Introduction: Broadcom BCM943224HMS PCI-E Mini Card User's Guide Before you begin Things you should know BCM943224HMS network Before you begin Obtain the following information from your network administrator (if you are a home user, obtain this information from the person that installed your wireless access point):

l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks that you want to connect to. l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks you want to connect to. l For Microsoft Windows networking, your customer name and workgroup name. l For your network account, your user name and password. l Your IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Things you should know When you start your computer, your Broadcom BCM943224HMS PCI-E Mini card detects certain wireless networks that are within range. Before you can connect to these and other wireless networks, you must configure a profile for each network using the information you obtained from your network administrator. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in the IEEE 802.11g standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network you are connecting to has enabled WEP, you must also enable WEP in the network profile and set the WEP key to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, you cannot connect to the network. Broadcom BCM943224HMS network The Broadcom BCM943224HMS solution allows you to make a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated below. Back to top Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Back to Contents Page Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Overview Utility Components Overview The Broadcom Wireless Utility enables you to do the following network tasks:

l Manage your wireless networks and create network connection profiles (Wireless Networks tab) l Connect to available networks (utility icon in notification area) l Get information about the network status and signal and noise of your network connection (Link Status tab) l View current and accumulated statistics (Statistics tab) l Find out which broadcasting networks are in range and search for nonbroadcasting networks (Site Monitor tab) l Run tests on the wireless network adapter (Diagnostics tab) l Get date and version information about the utility, and software, hardware, and location details about your wireless network adapter (Information tab) l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes (Wireless Networks tab) l Manually import EAP-FAST PACs (Wireless Networks tab) In the utility, you can open Wireless Network Wizard to connect to a basic network or create an ad hoc network, or you can open the Wireless Network Connection Settings tool to connect to an advanced network. To do any of the other tasks, click the tab that is associated with the described task. To start using the utility, right-click the utility icon If the icon is not available, open Broadcom Wireless Utility in Control Panel. in the notification area, and then click Open Utility. NOTE: The utility icon may not appear exactly as shown here. See "Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon."

Utility Components Utility components include the utility icon in the notification area, the six utility tabs, and Wireless Network Connection Settings. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (1 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Utility Icon To do any of the following tasks or operations, right-click the utility icon, and then click the appropriate item. l Open the on-line Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide

(Help Files) l Open About WLAN Card Utility to view links to Broadcom and Broadcom Customer Support websites and to view the version and date of the utility (About) l Hide the utility icon (Hide Tray Icon) l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Connect to any of the networks for which you have created a connection profile and are within range (Connect To) l Open the utility to the Wireless Networks tab (Open Utility) l Open the utility to the Link Status tab to view information about the connection (Status) l Display a log of your wireless network events (Display Log) Wireless Networks Tab The Wireless Networks tab has tools that enable you to do the following:

l Use the utility to manage your wireless networks l Add a network connection profile l Edit or remove a network connection profile l Change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections l Connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Show or hide the utility icon in the notification area l Choose which type of network to access l Lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile l Save your wireless network connection profiles as a WPN file l Import a WPN file l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes l Manually import EAP-FAST PACS On the Add menu, you can use either the wireless network wizard that is available from Broadcom Wireless Utility (see Connecting to a Basic Network or Creating an Ad Hoc Network Using the Wireless Network Wizard") or the utility (see "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility") to add a network connection profile. To use the utility to manage your wireless networks, select the Let this tool manage your wireless networks check box. To add a network connection profile, click the Add arrow, and then click either Use Wizard (basic network) or Use Utility (advanced network). To edit or remove a network connection profile, right-click the network name, and then click either Edit or Remove. To change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections, click the network name, and then click either the up arrow or down arrow. To connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list, right-click the network name, and then click Connect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (2 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide To disable the radio, clear the Enable radio check box. To enable the radio, select the Enable radio check box. To hide the utility icon utility icon check box.

, clear the Show utility icon check box. To show the icon, select the Show To choose the type of network to access, click the Options arrow, and then click Advanced. To lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the network name, and then click Lock or Unlock, as appropriate. NOTE: You must have system or administrator rights to be able to lock or unlock a profile. To save your wireless network connection profiles to a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Export (see "Saving Preferred Network Connection Settings to a File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

To import a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Import (see "Importing a Preferred Network Connection Profiles File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

Click Apply or OK after you change any of the settings for the change to take effect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (3 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide For networks that use the EAP-FAST authentication method, the Wireless WLAN Card Utility automatically adds trusted servers to the trust list and accepts auto-provisioning and AID (A-ID) group changes by default. The utility also enables you to import a Protected Access Credential (PAC). From the utility, you can also manually add or delete trusted servers, enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes, or import or delete PACS, as described in the following instructions. In general, you should use the default settings. Therefore, check with the network administrator before you make any changes. To manually add a trusted server to the trust list 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Click Add. 4. Type the A-ID friendly name of the trusted server in the space provided, and then click OK. To delete a trusted server from the trust list file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (4 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. In the Trust list (A-ID), click the name of the trusted server you want to delete, and then click Delete. To change the default settings for administering Cisco Compatible Extensions 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Clear the Disable auto-provision prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or rejection. 4. Clear the Disable A-ID group change prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or 5. Select the Auto-provision PAC only once check box to auto-provision a Protected Access rejection. Credential (PAC) only once. To import or remove an EAP-FAST PAC 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and 3. To import a PAC: in Protected Access Credentials, click Add, and then follow the on-screen then click Manage PACs. instructions. NOTE: The PAC is password protected, so you must know the password to be able to import the PAC.

-or-

To remove a PAC: click anywhere in the row that lists the PAC, and then click Remove. Link Status Network status and signal and noise information about your network connection is displayed on the Link Status tab. NOTES:

l For IEEE 802.11n connections, speed is indicated by an MCS value. l Radio Stream information is provided only for IEEE 802.11n connections. l Click anywhere in the Signal & noise history box to change the type of history being displayed. Successive clicks change the type from both signal and noise, to noise only, to signal only, and back to both signal and noise. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (5 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The status of your network connection is also indicated by the appearance of the utility icon number and color of the radio waves indicates the strength or weakness of the signal (see Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon for details). The To view the network name (SSID), speed, signal strength rating, connection status, and the client IP address of the network connection, move your mouse pointer over the utility icon. NOTE: On computers running Windows XP, you also can view the SSID, speed, signal strength rating, and connection status by moving your mouse pointer over the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the notification area. Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (6 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Icon Appearance Indicated Received Signal Strength The signal strength is very good or excellent. The signal strength is weak. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. No signal is being received. See Troubleshooting for probable causes and suggested action. The radio is disabled or switched off. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. Statistics On the Statistics tab under Current, the following current statistics are shown:

l Network name (SSID) l Connection time l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost l Total packets lost (%) Under Accumulated, the following accumulated statistics are shown:

l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (7 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Site Monitor Basic Site Monitor On the Site Monitor tab, the basic Site Monitor displays information about wireless routers/APs and ad hoc networks that are within range. To sort the list, click the column heading that shows the characteristic you want to sort by. For example, to sort by signal strength, click Signal . To view information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network. The network information is shown under Selected Network. To view or change the network connection settings for a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Editif you have not yet created a network connection profile for that particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network and want to do so, click Add . To see the information elements for a listed AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the AP or ad hoc network, and then click Show Information Elements. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (8 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide NOTES:

l Nonbroadcasting networks are labeled (nonbroadcasting) under Network Name. l The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting APs to which you are not currently connected. l The symbols under AP Band indicate IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, or IEEE 802.11n operation. To see more detailed information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Advanced. Advanced Site Monitor To save the activity log to a file, click the Options arrow, and then click Start Log. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (9 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide You can adjust the time interval between scans by clicking the Options arrow, and then clicking either one of the preset values or clicking Customize to specify a different time interval. NOTE: The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting networks to which you are not currently connected. To view detailed network information for a single nonbroadcasting network, type the network name in the Look for box, and then click Find. To reset the site monitor to the broadcasting networks, click Clear. Diagnostics On the Diagnostics tab, you can run a number of tests to determine if your wireless network adapter is functioning properly. Select the tests you want to run, and then click Run. For information about an individual test, look under Information before you click Run. To see the test results, look under Information after you click Run. NOTE: The network connection is lost when you run the tests. When the test run is over, your network connection is automatically reestablished. Also, you can view a log of your wireless network events. To do so, click Log. Examples of wireless network events that are logged include:

file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (10 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide l Initiation of user session l Connecting to a network l Disconnecting from current network l Authentication mode being used l Driver status l Supplicant status l New wireless device available l Initializing wireless state machine l Wireless utility is managing this adapter l Wireless utility is not managing this adapter If your Broadcom 802.11 Network Adapter fails any of the diagnostics tests, go to http://www.broadcom. com/ for technical support. Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (11 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The following information is displayed on the Information tab:

l Software details l Hardware details l Location details (shows the country for which the driver is installed and the channels supported for that location) Wireless Network Connection Settings The Wireless Network Connection Settings component is intended for use by advanced users or network administrators. You can use Wireless Network Connection Settings to create a connection profile for an advanced infrastructure network, a basic infrastructure network, or an ad hoc network (see " Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility"). Back to Contents Page file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (12 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Regulatory Statements for BCM943224HMS USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. CAUTION This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. Host product must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041". Canada Industry Canada (IC) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution:

This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed below, and having a maximum gain of 3.9 dBi @ 2.4GHz and 5.8dBi@5GHz. Antennas not included in this list or having a gain greater than 3.9 dBi @ 2.4GHz and 5.8dBi@5GHz are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. 0984 symbol and can be used throughout the This equipment is marked with the European community. This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:

EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 893 - Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN); 5 GHz high performance RLAN;

Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 62311: 2008 Assessment of electronic and electrical equipment related to human exposure restrictions for electromagnetic fields (0 Hz - 300 GHz) Marking by the symbol France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

indicates that usage restrictions apply. Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band 802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (51505350 MHz). - DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point in installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Taiwan NCC warning statement 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission granted, the frequency change, transmitting power enhance or alter of original design characteristic as well as function by company, enterprise, or user for approved Low-power radio frequency devices is not allowed. Article 14 Low-power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found, shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved. Above mentioned Legal Communications is defined as radio communications operation follows Telecommunications Act. Low-power radio-frequency devices must susceptible with the interference from legal communications, ISM radio wave radiated devices. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz .

 

 

OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

A. Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of the same type, with same or B. lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to Broadcoms reference designs, new C. antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with applicable regulations in all D. respects. E. required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer product that contains the text as Page 1 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 HSTNN-W82C antenna placement Laptop Mode WLAN Main WLAN Aux 7.8 cm 22.7 cm 184 mm 22.7 cm Bottom of laptop Bottom of laptop 22.7 cm Page 2 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 Tablet Bottom Face Maim/Aux 2.9 cm Tablet Edges (Landscape & Portrait) Secondary Landscape Aux Main 8.7 cm 9.0 cm t i a r t r o P y r a m i r P 21.6 cm Primary Landscape Page 3 of 9 0.4 cm t i a r t r o P y r a d n o c e S OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop and tablet computer to provide at least 1.8cm and 4mm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Page 4 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter module except such device has implemented two-

ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Page 5 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-

located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For portable configurations, antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop to provide at least 1.8cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the 0984 symbol and can be used throughout the European community. Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (51505350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

Page 6 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 Page 7 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. Page 8 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 9 of 9

 

 

OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN and Bluetooth modules Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. B. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Page 1 of 6 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN and Bluetooth modules

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. If the module is installed in portable hosts, where the separation distance between radiating elements and the user is less than 20cm, additional equipment authorization procedure to address RF exposure compliance shall apply. If the module is installed with other transmitting devices which can transmit simultaneously with this device and antenna-to-antenna distance is less 20cm, assessing RF exposure compliance with multiple transmitters within a host device shall be performed based upon FCC requirements. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Page 2 of 6 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN and Bluetooth modules To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. XXXX symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

Page 3 of 6 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN and Bluetooth modules 5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 4 of 6 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN and Bluetooth modules Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide. Page 5 of 6 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN and Bluetooth modules

6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 6 of 6

 

 

OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 16cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter Page 2 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency Page 3 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Page 4 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 5 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

Page 6 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 7 of 7

 

 

OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 16cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter Page 2 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency Page 3 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Page 4 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 5 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

Page 6 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM943224HMS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1041; IC: 4324A-BRCM1041 6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 7 of 7

 

 

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20082011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: February 2011 Document Part Number: 653267-001 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union Regulatory notices ..................................................................................................... 4 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules .................................................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 8 South Korea notice ............................................................................................................................... 8 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 8 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 8 Taiwan notices ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 9 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 9 Vietnam Compliance Marking Notice ................................................................................................... 9 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 10 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 11 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 12 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 12 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 iii New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 16 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 16 2 Safety notices ................................................................................................................................................ 17 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 17 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 17 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 17 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 17 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 18 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 18 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 18 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 18 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 19 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 19 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 19 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 19 China material content declarations ................................................................................................... 20 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 22 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 22 Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances ................................................................................... 23 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 23 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 23 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 24 iv 1 Regulatory notices Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. This guide provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. For later Windows operating systems, such as Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. To view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. 2. 3. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has wired and/or wireless telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available (in English only) either within the product documentation or at the following Web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (type the product number in the search box). The compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product:

4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices For non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth, within power class below 10 mW. For EU non-harmonized telecommunications products (if applicable, a 4-digit notified body number is inserted between CE and ! (the exclamation mark). Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The telephone connector (not available for all products) is intended for connection to analog telephone networks. NOTE: For products with wireless LAN devices, some countries may have specific obligations or special requirements about the operation of wireless LAN networks such as indoor use only or restrictions of the channels available. Be sure that the country settings of the wireless network are correct. In France, certain restrictions apply for the 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product. This product may be used indoors for the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 13). For outdoor use, only the 2400-MHz to 2454-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 7) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.arcep.fr. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Mobile Broadband Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions European Union Regulatory notices 5 with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Ergonomics notice Germany Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the ergonomic requirements and are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. When a mobile computer is used for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 This device is intended for use at visual display workplaces in compliance with BildscharbV, only with external keyboard and adequate external monitor. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 Das Gert ist fr die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV nur mit externer Tastatur und geeignetem Monitor vorgesehen. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Japan notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Bluetooth devices Japan notices 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notice Mexico notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este equipo puede que no cause interferencia y (2) este equipo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo interferencia que pueda ser causada por la operacin no deseada. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Vietnam Compliance Marking Notice This marking is for applicable products only. Taiwan notices 9 Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 15 minutes Initiate Sleep after 30 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Laser compliance 11 U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Modem notices 15 Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Heat-related safety warning notice 17 Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Electronic hardware and battery recycling 19 China material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 20 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. China material content declarations 21 Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. United States mercury disposal This HP product contains the following materials that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) http://www.eiae.org. NOTE: Notebook computers configured with LED backlights do not contain mercury lamps. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances 23 Index A airline travel notice 10 B battery notice 10, 17, 23 battery recycling 19 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 18 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 4 Canadian French notices 4 China Material Content Declarations 20 D DC plug of external HP power supply notice 16 Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 10, 23 equipment 19 mercury 23 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 19 ENERGY STAR compliance 10 environmental notices 19 equipment disposal notice 19 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 4 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 G GS Notice 6 24 Index H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 17 J Japan material content declaration 22 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 7 Japan power cord notice 16 K keyboard notice 18 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 16 mercury disposal notice 23 Mexico wireless notice 8 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 12 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 15 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 17, 23 Brazil 4 Canada 4 Canadian French 4 DC plug of external HP power supply 16 environmental 19 equipment disposal 19 ergonomics 6 European Union 4 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 17 Japan 7 Japan power cord 16 keyboard 18 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 16 mercury disposal 23 Mexico 8 modem 11 perchlorate material 23 power cords 16, 18 Singapore 8 South Korea 8 Taiwan 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 8 travel 18 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 23 Vietnam compliance marking 9 P power cord notice 16, 18 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 19 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 8 T Taiwan notice 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 18 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 8 18 U U.S. modem statement 12 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 23 V Vietnam compliance marking notice 9 voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 17 W wireless LAN devices 3 Index 25

 

 

Mini User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your device. To obtain the latest information in the Mini User Guide, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2009 Document Part Number: 574399-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the device, do not place the device directly on your lap or obstruct the device air vents. Use the device only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The device and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iii iv Safety warning notice Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware ....................................................................................................................... 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Lights ................................................................................................................... 2 Keys .................................................................................................................... 3 Front components ................................................................................................................ 3 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 4 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 5 Display components ............................................................................................................ 6 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 7 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 8 Additional hardware components ........................................................................................ 8 Identifying the labels ............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices ....................................................................................................................... 10 Identifying wireless and network status icons .................................................................... 10 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 11 Using the wireless button ................................................................................................... 11 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) .................................................... 12 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ........................................................ 12 Using operating system controls ........................................................................................ 12 Using a WLAN .................................................................................................................................... 13 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 13 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 13 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 14 Roaming to another network .............................................................................................. 15 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................. 15 Inserting a SIM ................................................................................................................... 16 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................................ 16 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ....................................................................................................... 17 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................................. 17 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems ................................................................................. 18 Cannot connect to a WLAN ............................................................................................... 18 Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network .................................................................. 18 Network icon for WLAN is not displayed ............................................................................ 19 Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable .................................................... 19 v Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................................... 20 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................................... 20 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) .......................................................................................... 20 3 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 22 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 22 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 23 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 24 Using other preinstalled multimedia software .................................................................... 25 Installing multimedia software from the Internet ................................................................ 25 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 25 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 25 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 25 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 26 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 26 Connecting an HDMI device .............................................................................................. 27 Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) .............................................. 27 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 27 4 Digital cards Inserting a digital card ........................................................................................................................ 29 Stopping and Removing a digital card ................................................................................................ 30 5 USB devices Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 31 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 31 Stopping and Removing a USB device .............................................................................. 31 Using the HP Mobile Drive (select models only) ................................................................................ 32 Inserting the HP Mini Mobile Drive .................................................................................... 32 Stopping and removing the HP Mini Mobile Drive ............................................................. 32 6 Drives Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................................. 34 Handling drives ................................................................................................................................... 34 Using external drives .......................................................................................................................... 34 Using optional external devices ......................................................................................... 35 7 Memory modules 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................... 39 vi Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 39 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 39 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 39 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 39 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 39 Initiating Standby (fn+f1) ................................................................................... 40 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) ................................................................... 41 Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f7) ............................................................... 41 Increasing screen brightness (fn+f8) ................................................................. 41 Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) ................................................................................ 41 Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) ........................................................................... 41 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) .................................................................. 42 Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) .................................................................... 42 9 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 43 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 43 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 43 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 44 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 44 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 44 Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 44 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 45 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 45 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 45 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 45 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 46 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................... 46 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 47 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 47 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 47 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 48 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 48 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 49 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 50 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 50 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 50 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 51 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 51 Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 51 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 51 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

vii Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 51 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 51 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 51 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep ............................................................. 52 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 52 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 53 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................... 53 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 53 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 53 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 54 Shutting down the device ................................................................................................................... 54 10 Security Protecting the device .......................................................................................................................... 55 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 55 Setting passwords in Windows .......................................................................................... 56 Setting passwords in Setup Utility ..................................................................................... 56 Administrator password ..................................................................................... 57 Managing an administrator password ............................................... 57 Entering an administrator password ................................................. 57 Power-on password .......................................................................................... 57 Managing a power-on password ...................................................... 58 Entering a power-on password ......................................................... 58 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 58 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 58 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 59 11 Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs ...................................................................................................................... 60 Backing up your information ............................................................................................................... 61 When to back up ................................................................................................................ 61 Backup suggestions ........................................................................................................... 61 Using system restore points .............................................................................................. 62 When to create restore points ........................................................................... 62 Create a system restore point ........................................................................... 62 Restore to a previous date and time ................................................................. 62 Performing a recovery ........................................................................................................................ 63 Recovering from the recovery discs .................................................................................. 63 Recovering from the dedicated recovery partition (select models only) ............................ 63 12 Software updates Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 64 viii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 64 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 65 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 66 13 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility ..................................................................................................................... 67 Using the Setup Utility ........................................................................................................................ 67 Changing the language of the Setup Utility ....................................................................... 67 Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility ...................................................................... 67 Displaying system information ........................................................................................... 68 Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility .................................................................... 68 Exiting the Setup Utility ...................................................................................................... 68 Setup Utility menus ............................................................................................................................ 68 Main menu ......................................................................................................................... 69 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 69 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 69 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 70 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 71 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ix x Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware Components included with the device may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most device models. To see a list of hardware installed in the device:

1. 2. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. Select Start > Control panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your device, and select Mouse. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 1 Lights Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Caps lock light Power light*

Wireless light Description On: Caps lock is on. On: The device is on. Blinking: The device is in Standby. Off: The device is off. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. 2 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Function keys Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Front components Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 3 Component

(1) Battery light Description On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the device is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the device are fully charged. If the device is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking: The hard drive or flash drive is being accessed. Drive light

(2)

(3) Speakers (2) Produce sound. Right-side components Component Description

(1) SD Card Reader Supports the following optional digital card formats:

(2) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in (microphone) jack MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled.

(3)

(4)

(5) HP Mobile Drive (select models only) Connects an optional HP Mini Mobile Drive. External monitor port RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Connects a network cable. 4 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Security cable connector Attaches an optional security cable to the device. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Vent USB port HDMI port Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, the computer may include an HDMI port or a USB port at this location. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 5 Display components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal display switch Webcam light Webcam Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. On: The webcam is in use. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. Internal microphone Records and captures sound. 6 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Battery bay Vents (3) Memory module compartment Holds the battery. Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Contains the memory module slot and a wireless LAN module slot. Also Holds the hard drive. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, replace the WLAN module with only a module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact technical support through Help and Support. Identifying the hardware 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless antennas NOTE: For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Additional hardware components Component

(1)

(2) Power cord*

Battery*

Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Powers the device when the device is not plugged into external power. 8 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component

(3) AC adapter Description Converts AC power to DC power.

*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the device provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the device. Service tagProvides important information including the following:

Product name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your device. Serial number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part Number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the hardware components of the product. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. Model description (4). This is the alphanumeric identifier you use to locate documents, drivers, and support for your device. Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this device. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the device. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the device. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the device, including the following:

Information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only). The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the labels 9 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleA wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Computers with WLAN devices support one or more of the following IEEE industry standards:

802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. NOTE: 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. 802.11n supports data rates of up to 450 Mbps and may operate at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, making it backward compatible with 802.11a, b, and g. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network status icons Icon Name Description Wireless (connected) Wireless (disconnected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless function key on the computer. Also identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that one or more of the wireless devices are on. Identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. 10 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

HP Connection Manager Wired network (connected) Wired network (disabled/disconnected) Network (disabled/disconnected) Network (connected) Network (disconnected) Opens HP Connection Manager, which enables you to create a connection with an HP Mobile Broadband device (select models only). Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, all network devices or all wireless devices are disabled in Windows Control Panel, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, no wireless connections are available or all wireless network devices are disabled by the wireless button or Wireless Assistant, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, one or more network devices are connected to a wireless network, and one or more network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and wireless connections are available, but no network devices are connected to a wired or wireless network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button or wireless switch (referred to in this guide as the wireless button) Wireless Assistant software HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Wireless Assistant software (select models only). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using wireless devices 11 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled in the Setup Utility, it must be reenabled in the Setup Utility before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the computer to a network or a Bluetooth-enabled device. To view the state of the wireless devices, click the Show hidden icons icon, the arrow at the left of the notification area, and position the mouse pointer over the wireless icon. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change Wireless Assistant properties:

1. 2. Click the wireless icon in the Wireless Assistant tile, which is located in the bottom row of Windows Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center. Mobility Center. Select the check box next to HP Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 3. Click Properties. 4. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Close. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:

1. Open Wireless Assistant by clicking the wireless icon in Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the Help button. Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) You can use HP Connection Manager to connect to WWANs using the HP Mobile Broadband device in your computer (select models only). To start Connection Manager, click the Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > All Programs > HP Connection Manager > HP Connection Manager. For more details about using Connection Manager, refer to the Connection Manager software Help. Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For example, Windows provides the Network and Sharing Center that allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To access the Network and Sharing Center, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >

Network and Sharing Center. For more information, select Start > Help and Support. 12 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The wireless computer (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-

Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the Using a WLAN 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network

(uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security Many wireless base stations, gateways, or routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks. Work behind a firewall A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a wireless security protocol that encodes or encrypts all network data before it is transmitted using a WEP key. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others will not be able to use the WLAN. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is amber, press the wireless button. 2. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. 4. Click Connect. Select your WLAN from the list. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing Center, and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed. You can choose to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. 14 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:

Information from your ISP and the manufacturer's instructions included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. For additional information on connecting your computer to a corporate WLAN, contact your network administrator or IT department. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use wireless wide area networks (WWANs) to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP Mobile Broadband supports the following technologies:

HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 15 Inserting a SIM CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. To insert a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband will be disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 16 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). 8. Replace the battery. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Bluetooth wireless devices 17 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:

Network configuration (SSID or security) has been changed. Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled. Wireless device or router hardware has failed. Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. NOTE: Wireless networking devices are included with select computer models only. If wireless networking is not listed in the feature list on the side of the original computer package, you may add wireless networking capability to the computer by purchasing a wireless networking device. Before working your way through the sequence of possible solutions to your network connection problem, be sure that device drivers are installed for all wireless devices. Use the procedures in this chapter to diagnose and repair a computer that does not connect to the network you want to use. Cannot connect to a WLAN If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is properly installed on your computer:

NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. 1. 2. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the terms wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, Wi-Fi, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver of the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information on troubleshooting WLANs, refer to the Web site links provided in Help and Support. Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection:

If there is a network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network icon in the notification area, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 18 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Network icon for WLAN is not displayed If the network status icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. Get the latest version of the WLAN device software and drivers for your computer from the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web site for the latest software. To get the latest version of the WLAN device software for your computer, follow these steps:

1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in Select your country or region. the search box. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 4. NOTE:

site for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a network key or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection on a secure network. The SSID and network key are alphanumeric codes that you enter into your computer to identify your computer to the network. For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:

1. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 3. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:

the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure that 4. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 5. Click OK to save these settings. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Troubleshooting wireless connection problems 19 WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:

Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point. Temporarily disconnect devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that other wireless devices are not interfering. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 1. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, refer to the router manufacturer's instructions. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the device. To connect the network cable:

WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. 20 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2. Plug the other end of the cable into a network wall jack (2). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting to a local area network (LAN) 21 3 Multimedia Multimedia features Your device includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your device may include the following multimedia components:

Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated webcam that allows you to capture photographs and videos Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures NOTE: Your device may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your device. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the device. 22 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) Internal microphone Webcam Webcam light Speakers (2) Volume up hotkey Volume down hotkey Volume mute hotkey Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Records and captures sound. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. On: The webcam is in use. Produce sound. Increases device sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Decreases device sound when pressed combination with the fn key. Mutes device sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:

Device volume hotkeyA combination of the fn key (1) and either the f8 (2), f10 (3), or f11 (4) function key:

To mute or restore volume, press fn+f8. To decrease volume, press fn+f10. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia features 23 To increase volume, press fn+f11. Windows volume control:

a. Click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Click the Mute Speakers icon to mute the volume. or a. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, and then click Open Volume Mixer. b. In the Volume Control column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. You can also mute the volume by clicking the Mute Speakers icon. If the Speakers icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:

a. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area. b. Click Customize notification icons. c. Under Behaviors, select Show icon and notifications for the Volume icon. d. Click OK. Program volume control:

Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your device includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music, watch movies, and view pictures. 24 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using other preinstalled multimedia software To locate other preinstalled multimedia software:

Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. For example, if you want to use Windows Media Player (select models only), click Windows Media Player. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. Installing multimedia software from the Internet To install multimedia software from the Internet, go to the software manufacturers Web site and follow the instructions. NOTE: Software downloaded from the Internet may contain viruses. Refer to the Security chapter for more information. Audio Your device has a variety of audio features that allow you to:

Play music using your device speakers and/or connected external speakers. Record sound using an optional external headset microphone. Download music from the Internet. Create multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs. Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphones, or a headset microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:

Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the correct jack on your device. (Cable connectors are normally color-coded to match the corresponding jacks on the device.) Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your device, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound and Audio Device Properties window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the arrow button to check the sound. Audio 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. To check the record functions of the device, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your device, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. Video Your device enables you to use a variety of video features:

Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector Use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the expansion port on the device. To connect an external monitor or projector:

1. Connect the optional VGA cable to the expansion port on the device. 2. Connect the external monitor or projector to the other end of the cable. NOTE:

fn+f2 to transfer the image to the external display. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the external display and the device. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display a screen image, press 26 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting an HDMI device The device includes an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) port. The HDMI port connects the device to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: To transmit video signals through the HDMI port, you need an HDMI cable (purchased separately). The device can support one HDMI device connected to the HDMI port, while simultaneously supporting an image on the device display or any other supported external display. To connect a video or audio device to the HDMI port:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the device. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device, according to the device manufacturers instructions. Press fn+f4 on the device to switch the image between the display devices connected to the device. 3. Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) To configure HDMI audio, first connect an audio or video device, such as a high-definition TV, to the HDMI port on your device. Then configure the default audio playback device as follows:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click either Digital Output or Digital Output Device (HDMI). 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return audio to the device speakers, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Webcam Your device includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam is an input device that allows you to capture still photographs and videos. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Webcam 27 NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. For optimum performance, observe the following guidelines while using the webcam:

If you are having trouble viewing or sending multimedia files to someone on another LAN or outside your network firewall, temporarily disable the firewall, perform the task you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall as necessary, and adjust the policies and settings of other intrusion detection systems. Whenever possible, place bright light sources behind the camera and out of the picture area. 28 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4 Digital cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other devices. The SD Card Reader supports the following formats:

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the device, do not insert any type of adapter into the SD Card Reader. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the device. 2. Insert the card into the SD Card Reader, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Inserting a digital card 29 Stopping and Removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the digital card. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. 3. To remove a digital card:

a. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. NOTE: You are prompted that it is safe to remove the hardware device. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). 30 Chapter 4 Digital cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

5 USB devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Devices can be connected to the system, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The device has 2 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. Depending on the model, the device may also have an HP Mobile Drive, which supports an optional HP Mini Mobile Drive. An optional USB hub, optional docking device, or an optional expansion product provides additional USB ports that can be used with the device. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device. To connect a USB device, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Stopping and Removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a USB device 31 To remove a USB device:

1. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left of the notification area). 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE: You are prompted that it is safe to remove the hardware device. 3. Remove the device. Using the HP Mobile Drive (select models only) The HP Mobile Drive is a USB port that allows you to add more storage to your device. The HP Mobile Drive can only be used with the HP Mini Mobile Drive (purchased separately). Inserting the HP Mini Mobile Drive Insert the HP Mini Mobile Drive into the HP Mobile Drive, and then push in until the mini drive is firmly seated and flush with the outside of the device. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Stopping and removing the HP Mini Mobile Drive CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop the HP Mini Mobile Drive before removing it. To stop and remove the HP Mini Mobile Drive:

1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or

<<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. 32 Chapter 5 USB devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 4. Remove the HP Mini Mobile Drive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the HP Mobile Drive (select models only) 33 6 Drives Identifying installed drives To view the drives installed on the device, select Start > Computer. Handling drives Drives are fragile device components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the device, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a device that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Standby and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the device. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the device. If you are unsure whether the device is off, in Standby, or in Hibernation, turn the device on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the device while an optional optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. 34 Chapter 6 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive Using optional external devices NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which device port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external device:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device. 2. 3. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it, and then unplug the AC power cord. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external drives 35 7 Memory modules The device has one memory module compartment, which is located on the bottom of the device. The memory capacity of the device can be upgraded by replacing the existing memory module in the primary memory module slot. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To add or replace a memory module:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the device and close the display. If you are not sure whether the device is off or in Hibernation, turn the device on by sliding the power switch. Then shut down the device through the operating system. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the device. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery from the device. 7. Using a small Phillips screwdriver, loosen the 2 cover screws (1). 8. Lift the memory module compartment cover (2) away from the device. 36 Chapter 7 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9. Remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:

CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module, and do not bend the memory module. a. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

37 c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the memory module. 11. Align the tabs on the memory module compartment cover with the notches on the device, and then close the cover (1). 12. Tighten the 2 cover screws (2). 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the device right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the device. 38 Chapter 7 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your device, and select Mouse Using pointing devices Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:

If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the device using one of the USB ports on the device. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and one of the function keys (2). The icons on the f1 through f4, and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting pointing device preferences 39 Function Initiate Standby. Switch the image. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute device sound. Decrease device sound. Increase device sound. Hotkey fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the device keyboard, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Initiating Standby (fn+f1) Press fn+f1 to initiate Standby. When Standby is initiated, your information is stored in memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the device is in Standby, the power light blinks. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Standby. 40 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The device must be on before you can initiate Standby. NOTE:

If a critical battery level occurs while the device is in Standby, the device initiates Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed in advanced power settings. To exit Standby, briefly slide the power switch. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Standby. NOTE:

hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the device, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from device display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the device and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the device using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the device. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:

LCD (device display) External VGA (most external monitors) Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f7) Press fn+f7 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the device cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the device. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the device. Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the keyboard 41 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. 42 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the device on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Press fn+f5. Briefly press the power button. Close the display. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard or button on the remote control (select models only). Activate the TouchPad. When the device exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting power options 43 Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 1,080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on both battery power and external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:

Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. The power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the device is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a low battery level, critical battery level, or reserve battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:

1. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). 2. Click Customize notification icons. 3. Under Behaviors, select Show icons and notifications for the Power icon. 4. Click OK. Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 44 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Selecting a different power plan Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 2. 3. Change the settings as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the device to prompt for a password when the device exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 1. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account NOTE:

password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the device, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Connect the device to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are charging or calibrating a battery When you are installing or modifying system software When you are writing information to a CD or DVD Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external AC power 45 When you connect the device to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the device is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The device switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f8 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the device). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the device to external AC power:

1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the device. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the device exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The device will not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power light is off. 46 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To test the AC adapter:

1. Remove the battery from the device. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the device, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Turn on the device. If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is working properly. Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f8 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Finding battery information in Help and Support The Help and Support Power and Battery Learning Center provides the following tools and information:

Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information:

Select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power and Battery Learning Center. Using Battery Check Battery Check, a part of the HP Support Assistant, provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 47 To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to function properly. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal and Mechanical >Battery Check. 2. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source may cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work and initiate Hibernation or shut down the device through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:

1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. 4. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. Align the tabs on the battery with the notches on the device (1), and then insert the battery into the battery bay. The battery release latches (2) automatically lock the battery into place. To remove the battery:

1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. 48 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery, and then remove the battery (2). Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, an optional expansion product, or an optional docking device. The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:

area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:

On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery has reached a low battery level or critical battery level and is not charging. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 49 Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens, as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the device when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the device enters a critical battery level, and the battery light begins blinking rapidly. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the device is on or in the Sleep state, the device initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the device is on or in the Sleep state, the device remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. 50 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 1. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the device is off or in use, but it charges faster when the device is off. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 51 To fully charge the battery:

1. 2. Connect the device to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or Insert the battery into the device. optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the device turns on. Leave the device plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the device turns off. 3. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Record the Turn off the display settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off the display settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. 9. Click OK. 10. Click Save changes. Step 3: Discharge the battery The device must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the device, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it. If you plan to leave the device unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the device occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the device is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. To discharge a battery:

1. Unplug the device from its external power source, but do not turn off the device. 2. Run the device on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the device shuts down. 52 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:

1. Plug the device into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the device turns off. You can use the device while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the device is off. If the device is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. 2. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the device reaches a critical battery level. 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. 4. Click Change advanced power settings. 5. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 6. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save changes. Conserving battery power Select the Power saver power plan through Power Options under System and Security in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f7 and fn+f8 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the device. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. Using battery power 53 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. For additional information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices included with this device. Shutting down the device CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the device is shut down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and device. Shut down the device under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the device When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port When the device will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the device with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. To shut down the device:

NOTE:

before shutdown is possible. 1. 2. Click Start. 3. Click Shut down. If the device is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the device from external power and remove the battery. If the device is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation Save your work and close all open programs. 54 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10 Security Protecting the device Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Setup Utility can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. Follow the procedures in this chapter to use the following features:

Passwords Firewall software Critical security updates NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents, but they may not deter software attacks or prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your device for service, remove all password settings. Device risk Unauthorized use of the device Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility, BIOS settings, and other system identification information Security feature QuickLock Power-on password Firewall software Windows updates Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the device Critical security updates from Microsoft Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your device information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Setup Utility preinstalled on the device. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the device, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. You can use the same password for a Setup Utility feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Setup Utility feature. Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Setup Utility:

A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in the Setup Utility must be entered at a Setup Utility prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Protecting the device 55 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the device. Do not store passwords in a file on the device. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider. The following sections list Windows and Setup Utility passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password User password QuickLock Setting passwords in Setup Utility Password Administrator password*

Power-on password*

Function Protects administrator-level access to device contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility contents. Protects access to a Windows user account. It also protects access to the device contents and must be entered when you exit Standby or Hibernation. Protects the device by requiring a password to be entered in the Windows Log On dialog box before you access the device. After you set a user or administrator password, follow these steps:

1. 2. Initiate QuickLock by pressing fn+f6. Exit QuickLock by entering your Windows user or administrator password. Function Protects access to Setup Utility. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you access Setup Utility. CAUTION:

cannot access Setup Utility. If you forget your administrator password, you Protects access to the device contents. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. CAUTION:

If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation.

*For details about each of these passwords, refer to the following topics. 56 Chapter 10 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Administrator password Your administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Setup Utility. After this password is set, you must enter it each time you access Setup Utility. Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Be sure that you record your password and store it in a safe place. Managing an administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering an administrator password At the Enter Password prompt, type your administrator password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the administrator password, you must restart the device and try again. Power-on password Your power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the device. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 57 Managing a power-on password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Power-On Password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering a power-on password At the Enter Password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the device and try again. Using antivirus software When you use the device for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. NOTE: HP recommends that you install antivirus software to help protect your device. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. NOTE: For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search field in Help and Support. Using firewall software When you use the device for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the device, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the device to protect your privacy. Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall user guide or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. 58 Chapter 10 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing critical updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the device from security breaches and device viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the device was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the device, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your device. Use the update link at Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update at regular intervals, such as once a month. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing critical updates 59 11 Backup and recovery Recovery after a system failure is as complete as your most current backup. HP recommends that you create recovery discs immediately after software setup. As you add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. Tools provided by the operating system and HP Recovery Manager software are designed to help you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Creating a set of recovery discs (Recovery Manager software feature). Recovery discs are used to start up (boot) your computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files. Creating system restore points (operating system feature). System restore points allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state. Recovering a program or driver (Recovery Manager software feature). This feature helps you reinstall a program or driver without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recovery (Recovery Manager software feature). With Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. NOTE:

If your computer includes a solid-state drive (SSD), you may not have a recovery partition. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. To check for the presence of a recovery partition, select Start > Computer. If the partition is present, an HP Recovery drive is listed in the Hard Disk Drives section of the window. Creating recovery discs HP recommends that you create recovery discs to be sure that you can restore your system to its original factory state if you experience serious system failure or instability. Create these discs after setting up the computer for the first time. Handle these discs carefully and keep them in a safe place. The software allows the creation of only one set of recovery discs. NOTE:

If your computer does not include an internal optical drive, you can use an optional external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can purchase recovery discs for your computer from the HP Web site. 60 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality DVD-R, double-layer DVD-R, DVD+R, double-layer DVD+R, BD-R

(writable Blu-ray), or CD-R discs. All these discs are purchased separately. DVDs and BDs have a much higher capacity than CDs. If you use CDs, up to 20 discs may be required, whereas only a few DVDs or BDs are required. NOTE: Read-write discs, such as CD-RW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, and BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs, are not compatible with the Recovery Manager software. The computer must be connected to AC power during this process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process. To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Recovery Manager > Recovery Manager. Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Advanced Options. NOTE:

AC power before you can go to the next step. If you are operating the computer on battery power, you will be prompted to connect to 3. Click Recovery disc creation, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis NOTE: Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software Backup suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using Recovery Manager. Create system restore points using the Windows System Restore feature, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up this folder periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Backing up your information 61 To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document, follow these steps:

a. Display the screen. b. Copy the screen:

To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. c. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste. Using system restore points When you back up your system, you are creating a system restore point. A system restore point allows you to save and name a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. NOTE: Recovering to an earlier restore point does not affect data files saved or e-mails created since the last restore point. You also can create additional restore points to provide increased protection for your system files and settings. When to create restore points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally NOTE:

If you revert to a restore point and then change your mind, you can reverse the restoration. Create a system restore point Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System Protection. 1. 2. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Under Protection Settings, select the disk for which you want to create a restore point. 5. Click Create. The System Protection window opens. Follow the on-screen instructions. 6. Restore to a previous date and time Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System protection. To revert to a restore point (created at a previous date and time), when the computer was functioning optimally, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Click the System Restore button, and then click Next. The System Restore window opens. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. 62 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Performing a recovery NOTE: You can recover only files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. Recovery Manager software allows you to repair or restore the system if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from recovery discs or from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive. However, if your computer includes a solid-state drive (SSD), you may not have a recovery partition. If that is the case, recovery discs have been included with your computer. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. NOTE: Windows has its own built-in repair features, such as System Restore and driver roll-back capabilities. If you have not already tried these features, try them before using Recovery Manager. NOTE: Recovery Manager recovers only software that was preinstalled at the factory. Software not provided with this computer must be downloaded from the manufacturer's Web site or reinstalled from the disc provided by the manufacturer. Recovering from the recovery discs To restore the system from the recovery discs:

1. 2. 3. Back up all personal files. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. Follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering from the dedicated recovery partition (select models only) NOTE:

If your computer includes an SSD, you may not have a recovery partition. You will not be able to recover using this procedure. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. On some models, you can perform a recovery from the partition on the hard drive from either the Start button or f11. This restores the computer to it's factory condition. To restore the system from the partition, follow these steps:

1. Access Recovery Manager in either of the following ways:

Select Start > All Programs > Recovery Manager > Recovery Manager. or Restart the computer and press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. Then select Recovery Manager. Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Advanced Options. 3. Click System recovery, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Performing a recovery 63 12 Software updates Updated versions of the software provided with your device may be available on the HP Web site. Most software and BIOS updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. To update the software, follow these steps, which are explained in the remainder of this guide:

1. Identify your device model, product category, and series or family. Prepare for a system BIOS update by identifying the BIOS version currently installed on the device. If your device is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. NOTE: The device system BIOS is stored on the system ROM. The BIOS initializes the operating system, determines how the device will interact with the hardware devices, and provides for data transfer among hardware devices, including the time and date. Access the updates on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Install the updates. Updating the BIOS 2. 3. To update the BIOS, first determine what BIOS version you currently have and then download and install the new BIOS. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the device, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by opening the Setup Utility. To display the BIOS information:

1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. If the Setup Utility does not open with the system information displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu. When the Main menu is selected, BIOS and other system information is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. 2. 3. 64 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the device or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the device is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the device is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the device or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:

1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:

Select Start > Help and Support > Maintain, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your device and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your device. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. 2. 3. b. NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your device to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Updating the BIOS 65 Updating programs and drivers 2. 3. To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:

1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:

Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to find the software you want to update. At the download area, select the software you want to download and follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the software will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the software. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 5. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 6. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 7. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The installation begins. 8. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 66 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

13 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility The Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Windows operating system is not working. The utility reports information about the device and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. To start the Setup Utility:

Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Using the Setup Utility Changing the language of the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a language, and then press enter. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your language selected is displayed, press enter. 5. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Your change goes into effect immediately. Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility Because the Setup Utility is not Windows based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while the Setup Utility is open, press f1. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Starting the Setup Utility 67 Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10 2. 3.

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Select the Main menu. System information such as the system time and date, and identification information about the device is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore the Setup Utility default settings. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter. 4. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. The Setup Utility default settings go into effect when the device restarts. NOTE: Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. Exiting the Setup Utility You can exit the Setup Utility with or without saving changes. To exit the Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. To exit the Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After either choice, the device restarts in Windows. Setup Utility menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE: Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your device. 68 Chapter 13 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password System Configuration menu To do this View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the device. View specification information about the processor, memory size, and system BIOS. To do this Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Select Language Support Processor C4 State Boot Options To do this Change the Setup Utility language. Enable/disable the processor C4 sleep state. Set the following boot options:

f10 and f12 Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the f10 and f12 functions of the Setup Utility in intervals of 5 seconds each (0, 5, 10, 15, 20). Internal Network Adapter bootEnable/disable boot from Internal Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:

Internal hard drive (select models only) USB Floppy USB CD/DVD ROM Drive USB Diskette on Key USB Hard drive USB Card Reader Network adapter NOTE: Only the devices attached to the system will appear in the boot order menu. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setup Utility menus 69 Diagnostics menu Select To do this Hard Disk Self Test (select models only) Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Memory Test Run a diagnostic test on the system memory. 70 Chapter 13 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index A AC adapter administrator password connecting 46 identifying 9 testing 46 creating 57 entering 57 managing 57 airport security devices 34 antennas 8 applications key, Windows 3 audio devices, connecting external 25 audio functions, checking 25 audio-in (microphone) jack 4, 23 audio-out (headphone) jack 4, 23 B backing up customized window, toolbar, and menu bar settings 61 personal files 61 templates 61 backup suggestions 61 battery calibrating 51 charging 49, 51 conserving power 53 discharging 50 disposing 54 identifying 8 inserting 48 low battery levels 50 recharging 53 removing 48 storing 53 battery bay, identifying 7 Battery Check 47 battery light 4, 49, 50 battery power 47 battery release latches 7, 48 battery temperature 53 bay, battery 7 BIOS, updating 64 Bluetooth device 10 boot options 69 boot order 69 button, volume mute 23 buttons left TouchPad 1 right TouchPad 1 C cables LAN 20 USB 31 VGA 26 caps lock light, identifying 2 CD drive 35 changing the Setup Utility language 67 charging batteries 49, 51 checking audio functions 25 compartments, memory module 7 components additional hardware 8 bottom 7 display 6 front 3 left-side 5 right-side 4 TouchPad 1 connecting to a WLAN 14 connection, external power 46 connector, security cable 5 conservation, power 53 cord, power 8 corporate WLAN connection 14 critical battery level 50 D Diagnostics menu 70 digital card inserting 29 removing 30 stopping 30 diskette drive 35 display image, switching 41 screen brightness hotkeys 41 display switch, identifying 6 displaying system information 68 drive light, identifying 4 drive media 43 drives diskette 35 external 34 hard 34 optical 35 drives, boot order 69 DVD drive 35 E earbuds 4, 23 encryption 14 entering a power-on password 58 entering an administrator password 57 esc key 3 exiting the Setup Utility 68 expansion port 26 external audio devices, connecting 25 external drive 34 external monitor port, identifying 4 F f11 63 f11 recovery 63 firewall 14 fn key 3, 39 full system recovery 60 function keys 3, 39 H hard disk drive, external 34 Index 71 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

hard drive 7 hard drive self test 70 hard drive, external 34 hardware, identifying 1 HDMI port 27 HDMI port, identifying 5 HDMI, connecting 27 headphone (audio-out) jack 4, 23 headphones 4, 23 Hibernation exiting 44 initiated during critical battery level 50 initiating 44 high-definition devices, connecting 27 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 41 internal display switch, identifying 6 internal microphone, identifying 6, 23 Internet connection setup 13 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 4, 23 audio-out (headphone) 4, 23 RJ-45 (network) 4 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 39 keys esc 3 fn 3 function 3 Windows applications 3 Windows logo 3 decreasing speaker sound 42 description 39 increasing screen brightness 41 increasing speaker volume 42 initiating QuickLock 41 initiating Standby 40 muting speaker sound 41 switching screen image 41 using 40 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 9 regulatory 9 service tag 9 language support 69 latches, battery release 7 left TouchPad button, HP Connection Manager software 12 HP Mini Mobile Drive inserting 32 removing 32 stopping 32 HP Mobile Broadband Module 15, 16 HP Mobile Drive identifying 4 using 32 HP USB Ethernet Adapter, connecting 20 hubs 31 I icons network 10, 19 wireless 10 interference, minimizing 20 identifying 1 lights battery 4 caps lock 2 drive 4 power 2 webcam 6 wireless 2 local area network (LAN) cable required 20 connecting cable 20 low battery level 50 M Main menu 69 managing a power-on password 58 managing an administrator password 57 memory module compartment memory module inserting 37 removing 37 cover removing 36 replacing 38 memory module compartment, identifying 7 memory test 70 microphone (audio-in) jack 4, 23 minimizing interference 20 monitor port, external 4 monitor, connecting 26 mouse, external connecting 39 setting preferences 39 multimedia components, identifying 22 multimedia software installing 25 using 25 mute button 23 mute hotkey, identifying 23 N navigating in the Setup Utility 67 network cable connecting 20 noise suppression circuitry 20 network cable, connecting 20 network icon 10, 19 network jack, identifying 4 network key 19 network security codes network key 19 SSID 19 noise suppression circuitry, network cable 20 O operating system 54 optical drive 35 P passwords administrator 57 power-on 57 set in Setup Utility 56 set in Windows 56 72 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ports expansion 26 external monitor 4 HDMI 5, 27 USB 5, 31 power connecting 46 conserving 53 power connector, identifying 5 power cord, identifying 8 power light, identifying 2 power-on password creating 58 entering 58 managing 58 Processor C4 State 69 product name and number, device 9 programs, updating 66 projector, connecting 26 public WLAN connection 14 Q QuickLock 56 QuickLock hotkey 41 R readable media 43 recovering a program or driver 60 recovering from the dedicated recovery partition 63 recovering from the recovery discs 63 recovery discs 60 Recovery Manager 60, 63 recovery partition 60 recovery, system 63 regulatory information HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number 9 regulatory label 9 wireless 9 release latches battery 7, 49 restore points 62 restoring default settings 68 right TouchPad button, identifying 1 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 4 S screen brightness hotkeys 41 screen image, switching 41 SD Card Reader, identifying 4 security cable connector, identifying 5 Security menu 69 security, wireless 13 selecting in the Setup Utility 67 serial number, device 9 service tag 9 setup of WLAN 13 Setup Utility, passwords set in 56 setup, device 1 shutdown 54 shutting down 54 SIM inserting 16 removing 16 Sleep exiting 43 initiating 43 software HP Connection Manager 12 installing 25 multimedia 25 Windows Media Player 25 Wireless Assistant 12 solid-state drive (SSD) 60, 63 speakers, identifying 4, 23 Standby hotkey 40 storing battery 53 supported discs 61 System Configuration menu 69 system failure or instability 60 system information 69 system recovery 63 system restore points 60, 62 T temperature 53 TouchPad buttons 1 identifying 1 using 39 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 1 traveling with the computer 53 turning off the device 54 U unresponsive system 54 USB cable, connecting 31 USB devices connecting 31 description 31 removing 31 stopping 31 USB hubs 31 USB ports, identifying 5, 31 V vents, identifying 5, 7 video transmission types 41 volume down hotkey, identifying 23 volume mute button 23 volume up hotkey, identifying 23 volume, adjusting 23 W webcam light, identifying 6, 23 webcam, identifying 6, 23 Windows applications key, identifying 3 Windows logo key, identifying 3 Windows, passwords set in 56 wireless antennas 8 Wireless Assistant software 11, 12 wireless controls button 11 HP Connection Manager 11 operating system 11 Wireless Assistant software 11 wireless function key 11 wireless icon 10 wireless light 11 wireless light, identifying 2 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 14 corporate WLAN connection 14 equipment needed 13 functional range 14 public WLAN connection 14 security 13 WLAN 7 WLAN device 10 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 73 writable media 43 WWAN device 15 74 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

Regulatory Statement

(to be included in the portable notebook PCs with WLAN radios) 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Page 1 of 2 Regulatory Statement

(to be included in the portable notebook PCs with WLAN radios) If the module is installed in portable hosts, where the separation distance between radiating elements and the user is less than 20cm, additional equipment authorization procedure to address RF exposure compliance shall apply. If the module is installed with other transmitting devices which can transmit simultaneously with this device and antenna-to-antenna distance is less 20cm, assessing RF exposure compliance with multiple transmitters within a host device shall be performed based upon FCC requirements. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Page 2 of 2

 

 

Computer User Guide Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. To obtain the latest information in the Computer User Guide, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2009 Document Part Number: 574399-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware ....................................................................................................................... 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Lights ................................................................................................................... 2 Buttons ................................................................................................................ 3 Keys .................................................................................................................... 4 Front components ................................................................................................................ 4 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 5 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 6 Display components ............................................................................................................ 7 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 8 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 9 Additional hardware components ...................................................................................... 10 Identifying the labels ........................................................................................................................... 10 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices ....................................................................................................................... 13 Identifying wireless and network status icons .................................................................... 13 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 14 Using the wireless button ................................................................................................... 14 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) .................................................... 15 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ........................................................ 15 Using operating system controls ........................................................................................ 15 Using a WLAN .................................................................................................................................... 17 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 17 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 17 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 18 Roaming to another network .............................................................................................. 19 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................. 20 Inserting a SIM ................................................................................................................... 20 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................................ 21 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ....................................................................................................... 23 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................................. 23 v Troubleshooting wireless connection problems ................................................................................. 24 Cannot connect to a WLAN ............................................................................................... 24 Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network .................................................................. 25 Network icon for WLAN is not displayed ............................................................................ 25 Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable .................................................... 25 WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................................... 26 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................................... 26 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) .......................................................................................... 27 3 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 29 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 29 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 31 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 32 Using preinstalled multimedia software ............................................................................. 32 Installing multimedia software from the Internet ................................................................ 32 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 33 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 33 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 33 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 35 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 35 Connecting an HDMI device .............................................................................................. 35 Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) .............................................. 36 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 37 4 Drives and external devices Drives ................................................................................................................................................. 40 Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................. 40 Handling drives .................................................................................................................. 40 Improving hard drive performance ..................................................................................... 41 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................. 41 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................... 41 Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay .................................................................. 41 Using external drives ......................................................................................................... 43 Connecting optional external drives .................................................................. 44 Sharing optical drives ........................................................................................................ 44 External devices ................................................................................................................................. 45 Using a USB device ........................................................................................................... 45 Connecting a USB device ................................................................................. 45 Removing a USB device ................................................................................... 45 Using Digital Media Slot cards ........................................................................................... 46 Inserting a digital card ....................................................................................... 46 Removing a digital card ..................................................................................... 47 vi 5 Memory modules 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................... 53 Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 53 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 53 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 53 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 53 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 53 Initiating Sleep ................................................................................................... 54 Switching the screen image .............................................................................. 55 Decreasing screen brightness ........................................................................... 55 Increasing screen brightness ............................................................................ 55 Initiating QuickLock ........................................................................................... 55 Muting speaker sound ....................................................................................... 56 Decreasing speaker volume .............................................................................. 56 Increasing speaker volume ............................................................................... 56 7 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 57 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 57 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 57 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 58 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 58 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 59 Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 59 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 59 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 59 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 59 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 59 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 60 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................... 61 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 61 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 62 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 62 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 62 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 62 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 63 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 64 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 64 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 64 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 66 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 66 vii Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 66 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 66 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 66 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 66 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 66 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep ............................................................. 67 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 67 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 69 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................... 69 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 69 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 69 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 70 Shutting down the computer ............................................................................................................... 70 8 Security Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................... 71 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 71 Setting passwords in Windows .......................................................................................... 72 Setting passwords in Setup Utility ..................................................................................... 72 Administrator password ..................................................................................... 73 Managing an administrator password ............................................... 73 Entering an administrator password ................................................. 73 Power-on password .......................................................................................... 73 Managing a power-on password ...................................................... 74 Entering a power-on password ......................................................... 74 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 75 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 76 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 77 9 Software updates Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 80 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 80 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 80 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 82 10 Setup Utility Starting Setup Utility ........................................................................................................................... 83 Using Setup Utility .............................................................................................................................. 83 Changing the language of Setup Utility ............................................................................. 83 Navigating and selecting in Setup Utility ............................................................................ 83 viii Displaying system information ........................................................................................... 84 Restoring default settings in Setup Utility .......................................................................... 84 Exiting Setup Utility ............................................................................................................ 84 Setup Utility menus ............................................................................................................................ 85 Main menu ......................................................................................................................... 85 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 85 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 85 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 86 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 87 ix x 1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most computer models. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer:

1. 2. Select Start > Control panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Identifying the hardware 1

(4) TouchPad scroll zone Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse. Lights Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Caps lock light Power light Wireless light Description On: Caps lock is on. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. 2 Chapter 1 Hardware features Buttons Component

(1) Power button*

(2) Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Turns the wireless feature on or off but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up.

*This table describes factory settings. For information about changing factory settings, refer to the user guides located in Help and Support. Identifying the hardware 3 Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Function keys Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Front components Component

(1) Speakers (2) Description Produce sound. 4 Chapter 1 Hardware features Component

(2) Battery light

(3) Drive light Right-side components Description On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking: The hard drive or flash drive is being accessed. Component Description

(1) Digital Media Slot Supports the following optional digital card formats:

(2) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in (microphone) jack Memory Stick (MS) Memory Stick Pro (MS/Pro) MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card xD-Picture card Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. The audio component cable must have a 4-conductor connector.

(3) USB ports (2) Connect optional USB devices. Identifying the hardware 5 Component

(4)

(5) External monitor port RJ-45 (network) jack Description Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Connects a network cable. Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Vent USB port HDMI port Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, the computer may include an HDMI port or a USB port at this location. 6 Chapter 1 Hardware features Display components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal display switch Webcam light Webcam Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. On: The webcam is in use. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you must install additional webcam software. Internal microphone Records sound. Identifying the hardware 7 Bottom components Component Description Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay.

(1)

(2)

(3) Battery bay Vents (4)

(4) Hard drive bay 8 Chapter 1 Hardware features Holds the battery. Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Contains the hard drive, the wireless LAN module slot, and the memory module slot. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, replace the wireless module only with a wireless module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact technical support through Help and Support. Wireless antennas Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennas (2)*

WWAN antennas (2) (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWANs).

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Identifying the hardware 9 Additional hardware components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Power cord*

Battery*

AC adapter Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Converts AC power to DC power.

*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides important information including the following:

Product name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your computer. Serial number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part Number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the hardware components of the product. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. 10 Chapter 1 Hardware features Model description (4). This is the alphanumeric identifier you use to locate documents, drivers, and support for your computer. Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer, including the following:

Information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module. The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Identifying the labels 11 12 Chapter 1 Hardware features 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleA wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Computers with WLAN devices support one or more of the following IEEE industry standards:

802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. NOTE: 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. 802.11n supports data rates of up to 450 Mbps and may operate at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, making it backward compatible with 802.11a, b, and g. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network status icons Icon Name Description Using wireless devices 13 Wireless (connected) Wireless (disconnected) HP Connection Manager Wired network (connected) Wired network (disabled/disconnected) Network (disabled/disconnected) Network (connected) Network (disconnected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless function key on the computer. Also identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that one or more of the wireless devices are on. Identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. Opens HP Connection Manager, which enables you to create a connection with an HP Mobile Broadband device (select models only). Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, all network devices or all wireless devices are disabled in Windows Control Panel, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, no wireless connections are available or all wireless network devices are disabled by the wireless button or Wireless Assistant, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, one or more network devices are connected to a wireless network, and one or more network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and wireless connections are available, but no network devices are connected to a wired or wireless network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button or wireless switch Wireless Assistant software (select models only) HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. 14 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Wireless Assistant software (select models only). Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled in Setup Utility, it must be reenabled in Setup Utility before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the computer to a network or a Bluetooth-enabled device. To view the state of the wireless devices, click the Show hidden icons icon, the arrow at the left of the notification area, and position the mouse pointer over the wireless icon. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change Wireless Assistant properties:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the wireless icon in the Wireless Assistant tile, which is located in the bottom row of Windows Mobility Center. 3. Click Properties. 4. Select the check box next to HP Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Close. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:

1. Open Wireless Assistant by clicking the wireless icon in Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the Help button. Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) You can use HP Connection Manager to connect to WWANs using the HP Mobile Broadband device in your computer (select models only). To start Connection Manager, click the Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > All Programs > HP Connection Manager > HP Connection Manager. For more details about using Connection Manager, refer to the Connection Manager software Help. Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For example, Windows provides the Network and Sharing Center that allows you to set up Using wireless devices 15 a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To access the Network and Sharing Center, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >

Network and Sharing Center. For more information, select Start > Help and Support. 16 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other devices and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of devices and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The computer, equipped with a wireless device (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. Using a WLAN 17 When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-

Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network

(uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security. Many wireless base stations, gateways, or routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks. Work behind a firewall. A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). is a wireless security protocol that encodes or encrypts all network data before it is transmitted using a WEP key. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others are not able to use the WLAN. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)., like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is blue. If the wireless light is amber, press the wireless button. 2. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. Select your WLAN from the list. 4. Click Connect. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing Center, and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed. You can choose to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 18 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:

Information from your ISP and the manufacturer's instructions included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Using a WLAN 19 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use wireless wide area networks (WWANs) to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP Mobile Broadband supports the following technologies:

HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Inserting a SIM To insert a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery. 20 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network CAUTION: When inserting a SIM, position the card with the slanted corner as shown in the illustration. If a SIM is inserted backwards or upside down, the battery may not snap into place properly and could damage the SIM and the SIM connector. To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. 7. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband is disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 21 7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). 8. Replace the battery. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. 22 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. Using Bluetooth wireless devices 23 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:

Network configuration (SSID or security) has been changed. Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled. Wireless device or router hardware has failed. Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. NOTE: Wireless networking devices are included with select computer models only. If wireless networking is not listed in the feature list on the side of the original computer package, you may add wireless networking capability to the computer by purchasing a wireless networking device. Before working your way through the sequence of possible solutions to your network connection problem, be sure that device drivers are installed for all wireless devices. Use the procedures in this chapter to diagnose and repair a computer that does not connect to the network you want to use. Cannot connect to a WLAN If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is properly installed on your computer:

NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. 1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the terms wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, Wi-Fi, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver of the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information on troubleshooting WLANs, refer to the Web site links provided in Help and Support. 24 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection:

If there is a network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network icon in the notification area, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Network icon for WLAN is not displayed If the network icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. Get the latest version of the WLAN computer software and drivers for your computer from the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. NOTE:

site for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web To get the latest version of the WLAN computer software for your computer, follow these steps:

1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. Select your country or region. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in the search box. 4. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a network key or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection on a secure network. The SSID and network key are alphanumeric codes that identify your computer to the network. For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. Troubleshooting wireless connection problems 25 If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several are displayed. 3. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:

the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure that 4. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 5. Click OK to save these settings. WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:

Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point. Temporarily disconnect devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that other devices are not interfering. If the connection does not improve, try forcing the device to reestablish all connection values:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several are displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, refer to the router manufacturer's instructions. 26 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the computer. To connect the network cable:

WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the cable into a network wall jack (2). Connecting to a local area network (LAN) 27 28 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network 3 Multimedia Multimedia features Your computer includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your computer may include the following multimedia components:

Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated microphone for recording your own audio Integrated webcam that allows you to capture photographs and videos Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures NOTE: Your computer may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your computer. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the computer. Multimedia features 29 Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Webcam light Webcam Description On: The webcam is in use. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you must install additional webcam software. Internal microphone Records sound. Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. The audio component must have a 4-conductor connector. Speakers (2) Produce sound. Volume mute hotkey Mutes speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. 30 Chapter 3 Multimedia Component

(7)

(8) Volume down hotkey Volume up hotkey Description Decreases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Increases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:

computer volume hotkeyA combination of the fn key (1) and either the f8 (2), f10 (3), or f11 (4) function key:

To mute or restore volume, press fn+f8. To decrease volume, press fn+f10. To increase volume, press fn+f11. Windows volume control:

a. Click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Click the Mute Speakers icon to mute the volume. or a. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, and then click Open Volume Mixer. b. In the Volume Control column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. You can also mute the volume by clicking the Mute Speakers icon. Multimedia features 31 If the Speakers icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:

a. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area. b. Click Customize notification icons. c. Under Behaviors, select Show icon and notifications for the Volume icon. d. Click OK. Program volume control:

Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your computer includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music, watch movies, and view pictures. Using preinstalled multimedia software To locate other preinstalled multimedia software:

Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. For example, if you want to use Windows Media Player (select models only), click Windows Media Player. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. Installing multimedia software from the Internet

To install multimedia software from the Internet, go to the software manufacturers Web site and follow the instructions. NOTE: Software downloaded from the Internet may contain viruses. Refer to the Security chapter for more information. 32 Chapter 3 Multimedia Audio Your computer has a variety of audio features that allow you to:

Play music using your computer speakers and/or connected external speakers. Record sound using the internal microphone or an optional external headset microphone. Download music from the Internet. Create multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs. Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphones, or a headset microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:

Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out

(headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the correct jack on your computer. (Cable connectors are normally color-coded to match the corresponding jacks on the computer.) Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound and Audio Device Properties window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the arrow button to check the sound. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the record functions of the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. Audio 33 NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. 34 Chapter 3 Multimedia Video Your computer enables you to use a variety of video features:

Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector Use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the computer. To connect an external monitor or projector:

1. Connect the optional VGA cable to the external monitor port on the computer. 2. Connect the external monitor or projector to the other end of the cable. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display a screen image, press NOTE:

fn+f2 to transfer the image to the external display. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the external display and the computer. Connecting an HDMI device The computer includes an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) port. The HDMI port connects the computer to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: To transmit video signals through the HDMI port, you need an HDMI cable (purchased separately). The computer can support one HDMI device connected to the HDMI port, while simultaneously supporting an image on the computer display or any other supported external display. Video 35 To connect a video or audio device to the HDMI port:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device, according to the device manufacturers instructions. 3. Press fn+f2 on the computer to switch the image between the display devices connected to the computer. Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) To configure HDMI audio, first connect an audio or video device, such as a high-definition TV, to the HDMI port on your computer. Then configure the default audio playback device as follows:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click either Digital Output or Digital Output Device (HDMI). 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return audio to the computer speakers, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 36 Chapter 3 Multimedia Webcam Your computer includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam is an input device that allows you to capture and share video. To acccess the webcam:

1. Select Start > All programs > ArcSoft WebCam Companion 3 > WebCam Companion 3. 2. Click Capture > Take pictures. NOTE: The picture is automatically saved in the My Documents folder. Webcam 37 38 Chapter 3 Multimedia 4 Drives and external devices 39 Drives Identifying installed drives Your computer includes a hard drive (with a rotating disc) or a solid state-drive (SSD) with solid-state memory. Because an SSD has no moving parts, it does not generate as much heat as a hard drive. To view the drives installed on the computer, select Start > Computer. Handling drives Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while the optical drive (select models only) is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. 40 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices Improving hard drive performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use the computer, files on the hard drive become fragmented. Disk Defragmenter consolidates the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. 2. Click Defragment now. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Shut down the computer before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. To remove the hard drive:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. With the hard drive bay toward you, loosen the 2 hard drive cover screws (1). Drives 41 8. Lift the hard drive cover away from the computer (2). 9. Disconnect the hard drive cable (1) that secures the hard drive to the computer. 10. Pull the hard drive tab (2) up and lift the hard drive (3) out of the hard drive bay. To install a hard drive:

1. Grasp the hard drive tab (1) and insert the hard drive (2) into the hard drive bay, until the rubber stops slide into place. 42 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices 2. Reconnect the hard drive cable (3). 3. 4. Align the tabs on the hard drive cover with the notches on the computer, and then close the cover

(1). Tighten the 2 hard drive cover screws (2). Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW and CD-RW Combo Drive Drives 43 DVDRW and CD-RW SuperMulti Double-Layer Combo Drive DVDRW and CD-RW SuperMulti Double-Layer Combo Drive with LightScribe Blu-ray ROM DVDR/RW SuperMulti DL Drive Blu-ray ROM with LightScribe DVDR/RW SuperMulti DL Drive HD DVD drive NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external drive to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered drive, be sure that the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the drive to the computer. 2. If you are connecting a powered drive, plug the drive power cord into a grounded AC outlet. To disconnect a powered drive, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Connecting optional external drives NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external drive to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered drive, be sure that the drive is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the drive to the computer. 2. 3. If you are connecting a powered drive, plug the drive power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the drive. To disconnect an unpowered external drive, turn off the drive, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external drive, turn off the drive, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Sharing optical drives Although your computer does not have an installed optical drive, you can easily access software, as well as install applications and access data, by sharing an optical drive from another computer that has an optical drive and is on the same wired or wireless network. Sharing drives is a feature of the Windows operating system that allows a drive on another computer to be made available for other people to use on a network. NOTE: For information on setting up a home network and sharing a drive, refer to Help and Support. NOTE: Some discs, such as DVD movies and game discs, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD sharing. 44 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices External devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Devices can be connected to the system, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The computer has 3 or 4 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. An optional USB hub, optional docking device, or an optional expansion product provides additional USB ports that can be used with the computer. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device.

To connect a USB device to the computer, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. External devices 45 To remove a USB device:

1. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left of in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE: You are informed that it is safe to remove the hardware device. 3. Remove the device. Using Digital Media Slot cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other computers. The Digital Media Slot supports the following digital card formats:

Memory Stick (MS) Memory Stick Pro (MS/Pro) MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) Memory Card xD-Picture Card (XD) xD-Picture Card (XD) Type H xD-Picture Card (XD) Type M Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the computer, do not insert any type of adapter into the Digital Media Slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 46 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices 2. Insert the card into the Digital Media Slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the digital card. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. To remove a digital card:

a. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (the arrow at the left of the notification area). b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. NOTE: You are informed that it is safe to remove the hardware device. c. Click Stop, and then click OK. 3. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). External devices 47 48 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices 5 Memory modules The computer has one memory module slot, which is located inside the hard drive bay. The memory capacity of the computer can be upgraded by replacing the existing memory module. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To replace a memory module:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. Using a small Phillips screwdriver, loosen the 2 hard drive cover screws (1). 49 8. Lift the hard drive cover (2) away from the computer. 9. Remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:

50 Chapter 5 Memory modules CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module, and do not bend the memory module. a. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the hard drive bay, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. 11. Align the tabs on the hard drive cover with the notches on the computer (1), and then close the cover (2). 12. Tighten the 2 hard drive cover screws (3). 51 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the computer. 52 Chapter 5 Memory modules 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. Using pointing devices Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:

If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the computer using one of the USB ports on the computer. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and one of the function keys (2). The icons on the f1 through f4, and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Setting pointing device preferences 53 Function Initiate Sleep. Switch the image. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute or restore speaker sound. Decrease device volume. Increase device volume. Hotkey fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the device keyboard, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Initiating Sleep CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. Press fn+f1 to initiate Sleep. When Sleep is initiated, your information is stored in memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the device is in the Sleep state, the power light blinks. 54 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard The device must be on before you can initiate Sleep. If a critical battery level occurs while the device is in the Sleep state, the device initiates CAUTION:

Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep. NOTE:

hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 Switching the screen image Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. NOTE: You must use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the computer. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the computer. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:

LCD (computer display) External VGA (most external monitors) HDMI (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with HDMI ports) Decreasing screen brightness Press fn+f3 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness Press fn+f4 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the computer cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. Using the keyboard 55 To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the computer. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the computer. Muting speaker sound Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Decreasing speaker volume Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker volume Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. 56 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard 7 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Press fn+f1. Briefly press the power button. Close the display. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Setting power options 57 Press a key on the keyboard or button on the remote control (select models only). Activate the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 1,080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on both battery power and external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:

Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. The power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a low battery level, critical battery level, or reserve battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:

1. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). 2. Click Customize notification icons. 3. Under Behaviors, select Show icons and notifications for the Power icon. 4. Click OK. 58 Chapter 7 Power management Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Selecting a different power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 3. Change the settings as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). 5. Click Save changes. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:

Using external AC power 59 WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are charging or calibrating a battery When you are installing or modifying system software When you are writing information to a CD or DVD When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. 2. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). 60 Chapter 7 Power management 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer will not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power light is off. To test the AC adapter:

1. Remove the battery from the computer. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is working properly. Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Select Start

> Help and Support > Get assistance. Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. Using battery power 61 WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Finding battery information in Help and Support Help and Support provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information:

Select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power Plans: Frequently Asked Questions. Using Battery Check Help and Support provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to function properly. 2. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal and Mechanical. 3. Click the Power tab, and then click Battery Check. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source may cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work and initiate Hibernation or shut down the computer through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 62 Chapter 7 Power management 2. Align the tabs on the battery with the notches on the computer (1), and then insert the battery into the battery bay. The battery release latches (2) automatically lock the battery into place. To remove the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery, and then remove the battery (2). Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, or an optional expansion product. Using battery power 63 The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:

area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:

On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens, as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the computer when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the computer enters a critical battery level, and the battery light begins blinking rapidly. 64 Chapter 7 Power management The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. Using battery power 65 Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available

Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available 1. Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available

Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by briefly pressing the power button. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. 66 Chapter 7 Power management To fully charge the battery:

1. Insert the battery into the computer. 2. Connect the computer to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the computer turns on. 3. Leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the computer turns off. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Record the Turn off the display settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off the display settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. 9. Click OK. 10. Click Save changes. Step 3: Discharge the battery The computer must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the computer, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it. If you plan to leave the computer unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the computer occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the computer is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. Using battery power 67 To discharge a battery:

1. Unplug the computer from its external power source, but do not turn off the computer. 2. Run the computer on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the computer shuts down. 68 Chapter 7 Power management Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:

1. 2. Plug the computer into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the computer turns off. You can use the computer while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the computer is off. If the computer is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the computer reaches a critical battery level. 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. 4. Click Change advanced power settings. 5. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 6. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save changes. Conserving battery power Select the Power saver power plan through Power Options under System and Security in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f3 and fn+f4 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. Using battery power 69 If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. For additional information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices included with this computer. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the computer is shut down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. To shut down the computer:

NOTE:

before shutdown is possible. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation 1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Click Start. 3. Click Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then click the Power button. Press the power button and hold for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 70 Chapter 7 Power management 8 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Setup Utility can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. Follow the procedures in this chapter to use the following features:

Passwords Firewall software Antivirus support (Norton Internet Security) Critical security updates NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents, but they may not deter software attacks or prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, remove all password settings. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility, BIOS settings, and other system identification information Security feature QuickLock Power-on password Firewall software Windows updates Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Critical security updates from Microsoft Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Setup Utility preinstalled on the computer. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the computer, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. Protecting the computer 71 You can use the same password for a Setup Utility feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Setup Utility feature. Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Setup Utility:

A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in Setup Utility must be entered at a Setup Utility prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider. The following sections list Windows and Setup Utility passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password User password QuickLock Setting passwords in Setup Utility Password Administrator password*

72 Chapter 8 Security Function Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility contents. Protects access to a Windows user account. It also protects access to the computer contents and must be entered when you exit Sleep or Hibernation. Protects the computer by requiring a password to be entered in the Windows Log On dialog box before you access the computer. After you set a user or administrator password, follow these steps:

1. 2. Initiate QuickLock by pressing fn+f6. Exit QuickLock by entering your Windows user or administrator password. Function Protects access to Setup Utility. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you access Setup Utility. CAUTION:

cannot access Setup Utility. If you forget your administrator password, you Password Power-on password*

Function Protects access to the computer contents. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. CAUTION:

cannot turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. If you forget your power-on password, you

*For details about each of these passwords, refer to the following topics. Administrator password Your administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Setup Utility. After this password is set, you must enter it each time you access Setup Utility. Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Be sure that you record your password and store it in a safe place. Managing an administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering an administrator password At the Enter Password prompt, type your administrator password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Power-on password Your power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Using passwords 73 Managing a power-on password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Power-On Password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a power-on password At the Enter Password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the computer and try again. 74 Chapter 8 Security Using antivirus software When you use the computer for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. NOTE: HP recommends that you install antivirus software to help protect your computer. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security, an antivirus program, is preinstalled on the computer. Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. Instructions for using and updating Norton Internet Security software and for purchasing extended update service are provided within the program. To access Norton Internet Security, or to get more information about it, click Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. NOTE: HP recommends that you always update the antivirus software to help protect your computer. NOTE: For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Using antivirus software 75 Using firewall software When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the computer, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the computer to protect your privacy. Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall user guide or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. 76 Chapter 8 Security Installing critical updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer. Use the update link at Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update at regular intervals, such as once a month. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. Installing critical updates 77 78 Chapter 8 Security 9 Software updates Updated versions of the software provided with your computer may be available on the HP Web site. Most software and BIOS updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. To update the software, follow these steps, which are explained in the remainder of this guide:

1. Identify your computer model, product category, and series or family. Prepare for a system BIOS update by identifying the BIOS version currently installed on the computer. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. NOTE: The computer system BIOS is stored on the system ROM. The BIOS initializes the operating system, determines how the computer will interact with the hardware devices, and provides for data transfer among hardware devices, including the time and date. 2. 3. Access the updates on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Install the updates. 79 Updating the BIOS To update the BIOS, first determine what BIOS version you currently have and then download and install the new BIOS. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by opening Setup Utility. To display the BIOS information:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. 3. If Setup Utility does not open with the system information displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu. When the Main menu is selected, BIOS and other system information is displayed. To exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:

1. 2. 3. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your computer:

Select Start > Help and Support > Maintain, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your computer and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. b. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. 80 Chapter 9 Software updates Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is to be downloaded. you must access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Updating the BIOS 81 Updating programs and drivers To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your computer:

Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to find the software you want to update. At the download area, select the software you want to download and follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the software is to be downloaded. you must access this path when you are ready to install the software. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 5. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 6. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 7. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The installation begins. 8. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 82 Chapter 9 Software updates 10 Setup Utility Starting Setup Utility Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Windows operating system is not working. The utility reports information about the computer and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. To start Setup Utility:

Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Using Setup Utility Changing the language of Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of Setup Utility. If Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a language, and then press enter. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your language selected is displayed, press enter. 5. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Your change goes into effect immediately. Navigating and selecting in Setup Utility Because Setup Utility is not Windows based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. Starting Setup Utility 83 To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while Setup Utility is open, press f1. Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in Setup Utility. If Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. 3. Select the Main menu. System information such as the system time and date, and identification information about the computer is displayed. To exit Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Restoring default settings in Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore Setup Utility default settings. If Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter. 4. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. The Setup Utility default settings go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. Exiting Setup Utility You can exit Setup Utility with or without saving changes. To exit Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. To exit Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After either choice, the computer restarts in Windows. 84 Chapter 10 Setup Utility Setup Utility menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE: Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your computer. Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password System Configuration menu To do this View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the computer. View specification information about the processor, memory size, and system BIOS. To do this Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Select Language Support Processor C4 State Boot Options To do this Change the Setup Utility language. Enable/disable the processor C4 sleep state. Set the following boot options:

f10 and f12 Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the f10 and f12 functions of Setup Utility in intervals of 5 seconds each (0, 5, 10, 15, 20). Internal Network Adapter bootEnable/disable boot from Internal Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:

Internal hard drive (select models only) USB Floppy USB CD/DVD ROM Drive USB Diskette on Key USB Hard drive USB Card Reader Network adapter Setup Utility menus 85 Select To do this NOTE: Only the devices attached to the system appear in the boot order menu. Diagnostics menu Select To do this Hard Disk Self Test (select models only) Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Memory Test Run a diagnostic test on the system memory. 86 Chapter 10 Setup Utility Index A AC adapter administrator password connecting 60 identifying 10 testing 61 creating 73 entering 73 managing 73 airport security devices 40 antennas 9 applications key, Windows 4 audio devices, connecting external 33 audio functions, checking 33 audio-in (microphone) jack 5, 30 audio-out (headphone) jack 5, 30 B battery calibrating 66 charging 63, 66 conserving power 69 discharging 64 disposing 70 identifying 10 inserting 62 low battery levels 64 recharging 69 removing 62 storing 69 battery bay, identifying 8 Battery Check 62 battery light 5, 63, 64 battery power 61 battery release latches 8, 62 battery temperature 69 bay, battery 8 BD drive 43 BIOS, updating 80 Blu-ray Disc ROM with SuperMulti DVDR/RW Double Layer 44 Bluetooth device 13 boot options 85 boot order 85 buttons left TouchPad 1 power 3 right TouchPad 1 wireless 3 C cables LAN 27 USB 45 VGA 35 caps lock light, identifying 2 CD drive 43 changing Setup Utility language 83 charging batteries 63, 66 checking audio functions 33 components additional hardware 10 bottom 8 display 7 front 4 left-side 6 right-side 5 TouchPad 1 connecting to a WLAN 18 connection, external power 60 conservation, power 69 cord, power 10 corporate WLAN connection 18 critical battery level 65 D Diagnostics menu 86 digital card inserting 46 removing 47 stopping 47 supported formats 46 Digital Media Slot, identifying 5 Disk Cleanup software 41 Disk Defragmenter software 41 diskette drive 43 display image, switching 55 screen brightness hotkeys 55 display switch, identifying 7 displaying system information 84 drive light, identifying 5 drive media 57 drives connecting external 44 diskette 43 external 43 hard 41, 42, 43 optical 43 drives, boot order 85 DVD drive 43 E earbuds 5, 30 encryption 18 entering a power-on password 74 entering an administrator password 73 esc key 4 exiting Setup Utility 84 external audio devices, connecting 33 external drive 43 external monitor port 35 external monitor port, identifying 6 Index 87 F firewall 18 fn key 4, 53 function keys 4, 53 H hard disk drive external 43 installing 42 removing 41 replacing 41 hard drive external 43 installing 42 removing 41 replacing 41 hard drive bay, identifying 8 hard drive cover removing 50 replacing 51 hard drive self test 86 hardware, identifying 1 HDMI port 35 HDMI port, identifying 6 HDMI, connecting 35 headphone (audio-out) jack 5, 30 headphones 5, 30 Hibernation exiting 58 initiated during critical battery level 65 initiating 58 high-definition devices, connecting 35 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 55 decreasing speaker sound 56 decreasing speaker volume 31 description 53 increasing screen brightness 55 increasing speaker volume 31, 56 initiating QuickLock 55 initiating Sleep 54 muting speaker sound 56 muting speaker volume 31 88 Index switching screen image 55 using 54 HP Connection Manager software 15 HP Mobile Broadband Module 20 HP USB Ethernet Adapter, connecting 27 hubs 45 I icons network 13, 25 wireless 13 installed drives, identifying 40 interference, minimizing 26 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 7, 30 Internet connection setup 17 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 5, 30 audio-out (headphone) 5, 30 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 53 keys esc 4 fn 4 function 4 Windows applications 4 Windows logo 4 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 11 regulatory 11 service tag 10 language support 85 latches, battery release 8 left TouchPad button, identifying 1 lights battery 5 caps lock 2 drive 5 power 2 webcam 7 wireless 2 local area network (LAN) cable required 27 connecting cable 27 low battery level 64 M Main menu 85 maintenance Disk Cleanup 41 Disk Defragmenter 41 managing a power-on password 74 managing an administrator password 73 memory module inserting 50 removing 50 memory module slot 8 memory test 86 microphone (audio-in) jack 5, 30 minimizing interference 26 monitor port, external 6 monitor, connecting 35 mouse, external connecting 53 setting preferences 53 multimedia components, identifying 29 multimedia software installing 32 using 32 mute hotkey, identifying 30 N navigating in Setup Utility 83 network cable connecting 27 noise suppression circuitry 27 network cable, connecting 27 network icon 13, 25 network jack, identifying 6 network key 25 network security codes network key 25 SSID 25 noise suppression circuitry, network cable 27 O operating system 70 optical drive sharing 44 P passwords administrator 73 power-on 73 set in Setup Utility 72 set in Windows 72 external monitor 6, 35 HDMI 6, 35 USB 5, 6, 45 ports power connecting 60 conserving 69 power button, identifying 3 power connector, identifying 6 power cord, identifying 10 power light, identifying 2 power-on password creating 74 entering 74 managing 74 Processor C4 State 85 product name and number, computer 10 programs, updating 82 projector, connecting 35 public WLAN connection 18 HP Mobile Broadband Module Q QuickLock 72 QuickLock hotkey 55 R readable media 57 regulatory information serial number 11 regulatory label 11 wireless 11 release latches battery 8, 63 restoring default settings 84 right TouchPad button, identifying 1 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 S screen brightness hotkeys 55 screen image, switching 55 security cable slot, identifying 6 Security menu 85 security, wireless 17 selecting in Setup Utility 83 serial number, computer 10 service tag 10 setup of WLAN 17 Setup Utility, passwords set in 72 setup, computer 1 shared drives 44 shutdown 70 shutting down 70 SIM inserting 20 removing 21 Sleep exiting 57 initiating 57 Sleep hotkey 54 slots security cable 6 software Disk Cleanup 41 Disk Defragmenter 41 HP Connection Manager 15 installing 32 multimedia 32 Windows Media Player 32 Wireless Assistant 15 solid-state drive (SSD) 40 speakers, identifying 4, 30 storing battery 69 System Configuration menu 85 system information 85 T temperature 69 TouchPad buttons 1 identifying 1 using 53 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 2 traveling with the computer 69 turning off the computer 70 U unresponsive system 70 USB cable, connecting 45 USB devices connecting 45 description 45 removing 45 stopping 45 USB hubs 45 USB ports, identifying 5, 6, 45 V vents, identifying 6, 8 video transmission types 55 volume down hotkey, identifying 31 volume up hotkey, identifying 31 volume, adjusting 31 W webcam light, identifying 7, 30 webcam, identifying 7, 30 Windows applications key, identifying 4 Windows logo key, identifying 4 Windows, passwords set in 72 wireless antennas 9 Wireless Assistant software 14, 15 wireless button, identifying 3 wireless controls button 14 HP Connection Manager 14 operating system 14 Wireless Assistant software 14 wireless function key 14 wireless icon 13 wireless light 14 wireless light, identifying 2 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 18 corporate WLAN connection 18 equipment needed 17 functional range 19 public WLAN connection 18 security 17 WLAN 8 WLAN antennas, identifying 9 Index 89 WLAN device 13 writable media 57 WWAN antennas, identifying 9 WWAN device 20 90 Index